Controlled-release formulation of HCV protease inhibitor and methods using the same

Abstract

Controlled-release dosage formulations including at least one compound of Formulae I to XXVIII herein and a controlled-release carrier and methods of treatment using the same are provided.

Description

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to controlled-release dosage formulations that are useful for treating a wide variety of diseases or disorders associated with hepatitis C virus (HCV) by inhibiting HCV protease (for example HCV NS3/NS4a serine protease), and/or diseases or disorders associated with cathepsin activity and inhibiting cathepsin activity.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

HCV has been implicated in cirrhosis of the liver and in induction of hepatocellular carcinoma. The prognosis for patients suffering from HCV infection is currently poor. HCV infection is more difficult to treat than other forms of hepatitis due to the lack of immunity or remission associated with HCV infection. Current data indicates a less than 50% survival rate at four years post cirrhosis diagnosis. Patients diagnosed with localized resectable hepatocellular carcinoma have a five-year survival rate of 10-30%, whereas those with localized unresectable hepatocellular carcinoma have a five-year survival rate of less than 1%.

Current therapies for hepatitis C include interferon-α (INF_α) and combination therapy with ribavirin and interferon. See, e.g., Berenguer and Wright, Proc Assoc Am Physicians, 110(2):98-112 (1998). These therapies suffer from a low sustained response rate and frequent side effects. See, e.g., Hoofnagle and di Bisceglie, N Engl J Med, 336(5):347-356 (1997). Currently, no vaccine is available for HCV infection.

HCV is a (+)-sense single-stranded RNA virus that has been implicated as the major causative agent in non-A, non-B hepatitis (NANBH), particularly in blood-associated NANBH (BB-NANBH) (see, International Patent Application Publication No. WO 89/04669 and European Patent Application Publication No. EP 381 216). NANBH is to be distinguished from other types of viral-induced liver disease, such as hepatitis A virus (HAV), hepatitis B virus (HBV), delta hepatitis virus (HDV), cytomegalovirus (CMV) and Epstein-Barr virus (EBV), as well as from other forms of liver disease such as alcoholism and primary biliar cirrhosis.

Recently, a HCV protease necessary for polypeptide processing and viral replication has been identified, cloned and expressed; (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,712,145). This approximately 3000 amino acid polyprotein contains, from the amino terminus to the carboxy terminus, a nucleocapsid protein (C), envelope proteins (E1 and E2) and several non-structural proteins (NS1, 2, 3, 4a, 5a and 5b). NS3 is an approximately 68 kda protein, encoded by approximately 1893 nucleotides of the HCV genome, and has two distinct domains: (a) a serine protease domain consisting of approximately 200 of the N-terminal amino acids; and (b) an RNA-dependent ATPase domain at the C-terminus of the protein. The NS3 protease is considered a member of the chymotrypsin family because of similarities in protein sequence, overall three-dimensional structure and mechanism of catalysis. Other chymotrypsin-like enzymes are elastase, factor Xa, thrombin, trypsin, plasmin, urokinase, tPA and PSA. The HCV NS3 serine protease is responsible for proteolysis of the polypeptide (polyprotein) at the NS3/NS4a, NS4a/NS4b, NS4b/NS5a and NS5a/NS5b junctions and is thus responsible for generating five viral proteins during viral replication. This has made the HCV NS3 serine protease an attractive target for antiviral chemotherapy.

It has been determined that the NS4a protein, an approximately 6 kda polypeptide, is a co-factor for the serine protease activity of NS3. Autocleavage of the NS3/NS4a junction by the NS3/NS4a serine protease occurs intramolecularly (i.e., cis) while the other cleavage sites are processed intermolecularly (i.e., trans).

Analysis of the natural cleavage sites for HCV protease revealed the presence of cysteine at P1 and serine at P1′ and that these residues are strictly conserved in the NS4a/NS4b, NS4b/NS5a and NS5a/NS5b junctions. The NS3/NS4a junction contains a threonine at P1 and a serine at P1′. The Cys→Thr substitution at NS3/NS4a is postulated to account for the requirement of cis rather than trans processing at this junction. See, e.g., Pizzi et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci (USA), 91(3):888-892 (1994), Failla et al., Fold Des, 1(1):35-42 (1996), Wang et al., J Virol, 78(2):700-709 (2004). The NS3/NS4a cleavage site is also more tolerant of mutagenesis than the other sites. See, e.g., Kolykhalov et al., J Virol, 68(11):7525-7533 (1994). It has also been found that acidic residues in the region upstream of the cleavage site are required for efficient cleavage. See, e.g., Komoda et al., J Virol, 68(11):7351-7357 (1994).

Inhibitors of HCV protease that have been reported include antioxidants (see, International Patent Application Publication No. WO 98/14181), certain peptides and peptide analogs (see, International Patent Application Publication No. WO 98/17679, Landro et al., Biochemistry, 36(31):9340-9348 (1997), Ingallinella et al., Biochemistry, 37(25):8906-8914 (1998), Llinàs-Brunet et al., Bioorg Med Chem Lett, 8(13):1713-1718 (1998)), inhibitors based on the 70-amino acid polypeptide eglin c (Martin et al., Biochemistry, 37(33):11459-11468 (1998), inhibitors affinity selected from human pancreatic secretory trypsin inhibitor (hPSTI-C3) and minibody repertoires (MBip) (Dimasi et al., J Virol, 71(10):7461-7469 (1997)), cV_HE2 (a “camelized” variable domain antibody fragment) (Martin et al., Protein Eng, 10(5):607-614 (1997), and α1-antichymotrypsin (ACT) (Elzouki et al., J Hepat, 27(1):42-48 (1997)). A ribozyme designed to selectively destroy hepatitis C virus RNA has recently been disclosed (see, BioWorld Today, 9(217):4 (Nov. 10, 1998)).

Reference is also made to the PCT Publications, No. WO 98/17679, published Apr. 30, 1998 (Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated); WO 98/22496, published May 28, 1998 (F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG); and WO 99/07734, published Feb. 18, 1999 (Boehringer Ingelheim Canada Ltd.).

Pending and copending U.S. patent applications, Ser. No. 60/194,607, filed Apr. 5, 2000 (corresponding to U.S. Publication No. 2002/010781), and Ser. No. 60/198,204, filed Apr. 19, 2000 (corresponding to U.S. Publication No. 2002/0016294), Ser. No. 60/220,110, filed Jul. 21, 2000 (corresponding to U.S. Publication No. 2002/0102235), Ser. No. 60/220,109, filed Jul. 21, 2000 (corresponding to U.S. Publication No. 2003/0036501), Ser. No. 60/220,107, filed Jul. 21, 2000 (corresponding to U.S. Publication No. 2002/0160962), Ser. No. 60/254,869, filed Dec. 12, 2000 (corresponding to U.S. Publication No. 2002/0147139), Ser. No. 60/220,101, filed Jul. 21, 2000 (corresponding to U.S. Publication No. 2002/0068702), Ser. No. 60/568,721 filed May 6, 2004 (corresponding to WO 2005/107745), and WO 2003/062265, disclose various types of peptides and/or other compounds as NS-3 serine protease inhibitors of hepatitis C virus.

There is a need for new treatments and therapies for HCV infection to treat, prevent or ameliorate of one or more symptoms of HCV, methods for modulating the activity of serine proteases, particularly the HCV NS3/NS4a serine protease, and for methods of modulating the processing of the HCV polypeptide.

Another aspect of the present invention is directed to inhibiting cathepsin activity. Cathepsins (Cats) belong to the papain superfamily of lysosomal cysteine proteases. Cathepsins are involved in the normal proteolysis and turnover of target proteins and tissues as well as in initiating proteolytic cascades by proenzyme activation and in participating in MHC class II molecule expression. Baldwin, Proc Natl Acad Sci, 90(14):6796-6800 (1993); Mizuochi, Immunol Lett, 43(3):189-193 (1994).

However, aberrant cathepsin expression has also been implicated in several serious human disease states. Cathepsins have been shown to be abundantly expressed in cancer cells, including breast, lung, prostate, glioblastoma and head/neck cancer cells, (Kos and Lah, Oncol Rep, 5(6):1349-1361 (1998); Yan et al., Biol Chem, 379(2):113-123 (1998); Mort and Buttle, Int J Biochem Cell Biol, 29(5): 715-720 (1997); Friedrich et al., Eur J Cancer, 35(1):138-144 (1999)) and are associated with poor treatment outcome of patients with breast cancer, lung cancer, brain tumor and head/neck cancer. Kos and Lah, supra. Additionally, aberrant expression of cathepsin is evident in several inflammatory disease states, including rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis. Keyszer et al., Arthritis Rheum, 38(7):976-984 (1995).

The molecular mechanisms of cathepsin activity are not completely understood. Recently, it was shown that forced expression of cathepsin B rescued cells from serum deprivation-induced apoptotic death (Shibata et al., Biochem Biophys Res Commun, 251(1):199-203 (1998)) and that treatment of cells with antisense oligonucleotides of cathepsin B induced apoptosis. Isahara et al., Neuroscience, 91(1):233-249 (1999). These reports suggest an anti-apoptotic role for the cathepsins that is contrary to earlier reports that cathepsins are mediators of apoptosis. Roberts et al., Gastroenterology, 113(5):1714-1726 (1997); Jones et al., Am J Physiol, 275(4Pt1):G723-730 (1998).

Cathepsin K is a member of the family of enzymes which are part of the papain superfamily of cysteine proteases. Cathepsins B, H, L, N and S have been described in the literature. Recently, cathepsin K polypeptide and the cDNA encoding such polypeptide were disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,501,969 (called cathepsin O therein). Cathepsin K has been recently expressed, purified, and characterized. Bossard et al., J Biol Chem, 271(21):12517-12524 (1996); Drake et al., J Biol Chem, 271(21):12511-12516 (1996); Bromme et al., J. Biol. Chem., 271(4):2126-2132 (1996).

Cathepsin K has been variously denoted as cathepsin O, cathepsin X or cathepsin O2 in the literature. The designation cathepsin K is considered to be the more appropriate one (name assigned by Nomenclature Committee of the International Union of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology).

Cathepsins of the papain superfamily of cysteine proteases function in the normal physiological process of protein degradation in animals, including humans, e.g., in the degradation of connective tissue. However, elevated levels of these enzymes in the body can result in pathological conditions leading to disease. Thus, cathepsins have been implicated in various disease states, including but not limited to, infections by pneumocystis carinii, trypsanoma cruzi, trypsanoma brucei brucei, and Crithidia fusiculata; as well as in schistosomiasis malaria, tumor metastasis, metachromatic leukodystrophy, muscular dystrophy, amytrophy, and the like. See International Publication Number WO 94/04172, published on Mar. 3, 1994, and references cited therein. See also European Patent Application EP 0 603 873 A1, and references cited therein. Two bacterial cysteine proteases from P. gingivallis, called gingipains, have been implicated in the pathogenesis of gingivitis. Potempa et al., Perspectives in Drug Discovery and Design, 2:445-458 (1994).

Cathepsin K is believed to play a causative role in diseases of excessive bone or cartilage loss. Bone is composed of a protein matrix in which spindle- or plate-shaped crystals of hydroxyapatite are incorporated. Type I Collagen represents the major structural protein of bone comprising approximately 90% of the structural protein. The remaining 10% of matrix is composed of a number of non-collagenous proteins, including osteocalcin, proteoglycans, osteopontin, osteonectin, thrombospondin, fibronectin, and bone sialoprotein. Skeletal bone undergoes remodeling at discrete foci throughout life. These foci, or remodeling units, undergo a cycle consisting of a bone resorption phase followed by a phase of bone replacement. Bone resorption is carried out by osteoclasts, which are multinuclear cells of hematopoietic lineage. In several disease states, such as osteoporosis and Paget's disease, the normal balance between bone resorption and formation is disrupted, and there is a net loss of bone at each cycle. Ultimately, this leads to weakening of the bone and may result in increased fracture risk with minimal trauma.

The abundant selective expression of cathepsin K in osteoclasts strongly suggests that this enzyme is essential for bone resorption. Thus, selective inhibition of cathepsin K may provide an effective treatment for diseases of excessive bone loss, including, but not limited to, osteoporosis, gingival diseases such as gingivitis and periodontitis, Paget's disease, hypercalcemia of malignancy, and metabolic bone disease. Cathepsin K levels have also been demonstrated to be elevated in chondroclasts of osteoarthritic synovium. Thus, selective inhibition of cathepsin K may also be useful for treating diseases of excessive cartilage or matrix degradation, including, but not limited to, osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis. Metastatic neoplastic cells also typically express high levels of proteolytic enzymes that degrade the surrounding matrix. Thus, selective inhibition of cathepsin K may also be useful for treating certain neoplastic diseases.

There are reports in the literature of the expression of Cathepsin B and L antigen and that activity is associated with early colorectal cancer progression. Troy et al., Eur J Cancer, 40(10):1610-1616 (2004). The findings suggest that cysteine proteases play an important role in colorectal cancer progression.

Cathepsin L has been shown to be an important protein mediating the malignancy of gliomas and it has been suggested that its inhibition may diminish their invasion and lead to increased tumor cell apoptosis by reducing apoptotic threshold. Levicar et al., Cancer Gene Ther, 10(2):141-151 (2003).

Katunuma et al., Arch Biochem Biophys, 397(2):305-311 (2002) reports on antihypercalcemic and antimetastatic effects of CLIK-148 in vivo, which is a specific inhibitor of cathepsin L. This reference also reports that CLIK-148 treatment reduced distant bone metastasis to the femur and tibia of melanoma A375 tumors implanted into the left ventricle of the heart.

Rousselet et al., Cancer Res, 64(1):146-151 (2004) reports that anti-cathepsin L single chain variable fragment (ScFv) could be used to inhibit the tumorigenic and metastatic phenotype of human melanoma, depending on procathepsin L secretion, and the possible use of anti-cathepsin L ScFv as a molecular tool in a therapeutic cellular approach.

Colella and Casey, Biotech Histochem, 78(2):101-108 (2003) reports that the cysteine proteinases cathepsin L and B participate in the invasive ability of the PC3 prostrate cancer cell line, and the potential of using cystein protease inhibitors such as cystatins as anti-metastatic agents.

Krueger et al., Cancer Gene Ther, 8(7):522-528 (2001) reports that in human osteosarcoma cell line MNNG/HOS, cathepsin L influences cellular malignancy by promoting migration and basement membrane degradation.

Frohlich et al., Arch Dermatol Res, 295(10):411-421 (2004) reports that cathepsins B and L are involved in invasion of basal cell carcinoma (BCC) cells.

U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 60/673,294, entitled “Compounds for Inhibiting Cathepsin Activity,” filed Apr. 20, 2005 (corresponding to WO 2006/113942), discloses various types of peptides and/or other compounds as inhibitors of cathepsin.

Cathepsins therefore are attractive targets for the discovery of novel chemotherapeutics and methods of treatment effective against a variety of diseases. There is a need for compounds and combinations useful in the inhibition of cathepsin activity and in the treatment of these disorders.

Further, there is a need for controlled-release dosage formulations to maintain a minimum plasma concentration of such compounds to enhance treatment efficacy. In particular, there is a need for controlled-release formulations that increase the extent of HCV protease inhibitor absorption thereby enhancing bioavailability and increasing the time during which an HCV protease inhibitor is present in the plasma at a concentration that is efficacious. Such formulations can reduce the dose required for the same therapeutic effect, reduce the cost of goods for the product, as well as reduce the frequency of dosing and thereby add patient convenience.

Citation of or reference to any application or publication in this Section or any Section of this application is not an admission that such document is available as prior art to the present invention.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention provides a controlled-release dosage formulation for modulating the activity of hepatitis C virus (HCV) protease in a subject, comprising at least one HCV protease inhibitor and a controlled-release carrier to control the release of at least one HCV protease inhibitor, comprising administering to said subject an effective amount of at least one HCV protease inhibitor compound of various structural formulae set forth below. The HCV protease inhibitor compounds disclosed herein can also be cathepsin inhibitors. In one embodiment, the present invention provides controlled-release dosage formulations comprising at least one compound of Formula I to XXVIII (detailed below), or a mixture of two or more thereof, and a controlled-release carrier to control the release of said at least one compound of Formula I to XXVIII.

The present invention further provides a method for modulating the activity of HCV protease in a subject, wherein the method comprises administering to a subject in need of such treatment a dosage form containing at least one HCV protease inhibitor in a pharmaceutically effective amount thereof through a controlled-release formulation of at least one HCV protease inhibitor compound of various structural formulae set forth below. In one embodiment, the present invention provides methods for treating or ameliorating one or more symptoms of HCV, or disorders associated with HCV comprising administering an effective amount of the aforementioned controlled-release dosage formulation(s) to a subject in need of such treatment. In another embodiment, the present invention provides methods for treating a cathepsin-associated disorder comprising administering an effective amount of the aforementioned controlled-release dosage formulation(s) to a subject in need of such treatment.

The present invention provides controlled-release dosage formulation comprising the following ingredients:

(a) at least one compound selected from the group consisting of Formula I to XXVIII, and

(b) a controlled-release carrier to control the release of said at least one compound of Formulae I to XXVIII;

wherein the carrier comprises at least one swellable polymer.

In one embodiment, the ingredients further comprise at least one disintegrant. In one embodiment, at least one disintegrant is a superdisintegrant.

In one embodiment, the ingredients further comprise at least one lubricant.

In one embodiment, the ingredients further comprise at least one diluent.

In one embodiment, the ingredients comprise at least one swellable polymer at about 7 to about 25% wt.

In one embodiment, the ingredients comprise at least one disintegrant at about 15 to about 35% wt.

In one embodiment, the ingredients comprise at least one lubricant at about 6 to about 25% wt.

In one embodiment, the ingredients comprise at least one diluent at about 10 to about 30% wt.

In one embodiment, at least one swellable polymer is a polyvinylacetate.

In one embodiment, the ingredients comprise at least one disintegrant at about 15 to about 35% wt.

In one embodiment, the ingredients comprise at least one lubricant at about 6 to about 25% wt.

In one embodiment, the ingredients comprise at least one diluent at about 10 to about 30% wt.

In one embodiment, at least one compound is Formula I. In one embodiment, at least one compound is Formula XXVII.

The present invention also provides methods for modulating the activity of Hepatitis C virus (HCV) protease in a subject, wherein the method comprises administering to a subject in need of such treatment at least one HCV protease inhibitor in a pharmaceutically effective amount thereof in a controlled-release formulation.

In one embodiment, the controlled-release dosage formulations are selected from the following:

Ingredients:                     % w/w
Kollidon SR                      about 7 to about 25%
Crosspovidone                    about 15 to about 35%
Polyox-poly(ethylene oxide) WSR N-60K/WSR about 6 to about 35%
301/WSRCoagulant
Mg Stearate                      about 1%
At least one compound of Formula I to about 30 to about 66%
XXVIII
Kollidon SR                      about 7 to about 25%
Crosspovidone                    about 15 to about 35%
Natrosol Hydroxyethylcellulose 250HX about 6 to about 35%
Pharm, 250HHX Pharm
Mg Stearate                      about 1%
At least one compound of Formula I to about 30 to about 66%
XXVIII
Kollidon SR                      about 7 to about 25%
Crosspovidone                    about 15 to about 35%
Sodium Carboxymethyl cellulose 9M31F about 6 to about 35%
PH/12M31 P
Mg Stearate                      about 1%
At least one compound of Formula I to about 30 to about 66%
XXVIII
Kollidon SR                      about 7 to about 25%
L-HPC                            about 10 to about 30%
Polyox-poly(ethylene oxide) WSR N-60K/WSR about 6 to about 35%
301/WSRCoagulant
Mg Stearate                      about 1%
At least one compound of Formula I to about 30 to about 66%
XXVIII
Kollidon SR                      about 7 to about 25%
L-HPC                            about 10 to about 30%
Natrosol Hydroxy ethyl cellulose 250HX about 6 to about 25%
Pharm, 250HHX Pharm
Mg Stearate                      about 1%
At least one compound of Formula I to about 30 to about 66%
XXVIII
Kollidon SR                      about 7 to about 25%
L-HPC                            about 10 to about 30%
Aqualon Sodium Carboxymethyl cellulose about 6 to about 35%
9M31F PH/12M31 P
Mg Stearate                      about 1%
At least one compound of Formula I to about 30 to about 66%
XXVIII

The present invention provides novel controlled release formulations which are adapted for continued drug release and retention of dosage form in the stomach and for rapid release of drug as it moves from the stomach into the higher pH environment of the intestine. The invention also provides methods for efficient delivery of drug for improved bioavailability and convenience of dosing.

In one aspect, the invention provides formulations suited for oral administration comprising one or more pH sensitive polymers that extend the time of drug delivery into both the stomach and upper GI tract for purposes of achieving a greater and more prolonged therapeutic effect. The pH sensitive polymers are selected to augment drug dissolution/release at the higher pH of the intestine thereby releasing any drug remaining associated in the formulation as it is expelled from the stomach to reach the small intestine. In a non-limiting embodiment of the invention, such pH sensitive polymers may be further characterized by their ability to imbibe water and expand, thereby, further increasing the likelihood of drug release in the desired gastric-intestinal environment.

Accordingly, the present invention provides a gastric controlled release formulation adapted for oral administration comprising one or more pH sensitive polymers and a therapeutic agent, wherein the pH sensitive polymer allows for release of the therapeutic agent in the increased pH of the small intestine. In an embodiment of the invention, the pH sensitive polymer is selected from the group consisting of Carbapol 71 G, hypromellose acetate succinate (HPMCAS), Eudragit L-100, Eudragit S-100, Eudragit L-30D, Euragit FS 30D, Eudragit L-100-55, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate 50, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate 55, cellulose acetate phthalate and cellulose acetate trimellate.

In another embodiment of the invention, the formulations of the invention further comprise a swellable biocompatible hydrophilic polymer that is not necessarily a pH sensitive polymer, which is capable of volume-expansion in the aqueous environment of the stomach to a size, that increases the likelihood that the composition will be retained in the stomach for a prolonged period of time.

Accordingly, the gastric controlled release formulations of the present invention further comprising a swellable hydrophilic polymer. In a specific embodiment of the invention, the swellable hydrophilic polymer is selected from the group consisting of Synthetic hydrophilic polymers useful herein include, but are not limited to: polyalkylene oxides, particularly poly(ethylene oxide), polyethylene glycol and poly(ethylene oxide)-poly(propylene oxide) copolymers; cellulosic polymers; acrylic acid and methacrylic acid polymers, copolymers and esters thereof, preferably formed from acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, and copolymers thereof, with each other or with additional acrylate species such as aminoethyl acrylate; maleic anhydride copolymers; polymaleic acid; poly(acrylamides) such as polyacrylamide per se, poly(methacrylamide), poly(dimethylacrylamide), and poly(N-isopropyl-acrylamide); poly(olefinic alcohol) such as poly(vinyl alcohol); poly(N-vinyl lactams) such as poly(vinyl pyrrolidone), poly(N-vinyl caprolactam), and copolymers thereof; polyols such as glycerol, polyglycerol (particularly highly branched polyglycerol), propylene glycol and trimethylene glycol substituted with one or more polyalkylene oxides, e.g., mono-, di- and tri-polyoxyethylated glycerol, mono- and di-polyoxyethylated propylene glycol, and mono- and di-polyoxyethylated trimethylene glycol; polyoxyethylated sorbitol and polyoxyethylated glucose; polyoxazolines, including poly(methyloxazoline) and poly(ethyloxazoline); polyvinylamines; polyvinylacetates, including polyvinylacetate per se as well as ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymers, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, and the like; polyimines, such as polyethyleneimine; starch and starch-based polymers; polyurethane hydrogels; chitosan; polysaccharide gums; zein; and shellac, ammoniated shellac, shellac-acetyl alcohol, and shellac n-butyl stearate. In a preferred embodiment of the invention, the swellable polymer is a polyvinyl acetate. In yet another embodiment of the invention, the polyvinyl acetate is Kollidon SR.

In another aspect of the invention, the formulations of invention further comprise one or more therapeutic agents formulated for controlled release upon ingestion. Such agents are those compounds capable of exerting a therapeutically beneficial effect on a patient and include prodrugs, hydrates, solvates, molecular complexes, co-crystals, co-precipitates, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and derivatives of the compound. In a specific embodiment of the invention, the formulation of the invention comprises an HCV serine protease inhibitor.

The gastric controlled release formulations of the invention may further comprise one or more pharmaceutically acceptable adjuvants, such as surfactants, pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and excipients such as fillers, binders, glidents, lubricants, and disintegrants. Each excipient must be acceptable in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the mammal in need of treatment.

In a specific embodiment of the invention, the disintegrant is selected from the group consisting of cross-linked carboxymethyl cellulose sodium, sodium starch glycolate and cross-linked polyvinyl pyrollidone.

In a specific embodiment of the invention, the disintegrant is a super disintegrant. In another embodiment of the invention, the disintegrant is selected from the group consisting of cross-linked carboxymethyl cellulose sodium, sodium starch glycolate and cross-linked polyvinyl pyrollidone.

In another aspect of the invention, a gastric controlled release formulation adapted for oral administration is provided comprising one or more swellable hydrophilic polymers, one or more pH sensitive polymers, a superdisintegrant and a therapeutic agent.

In a further aspect, the invention provides a method of treating a subject in need thereof with a therapeutic agent that comprises administering to the subject a dosage form adapted to be retained in the stomach over a prolonged period and further adapted to rapidly disintegrate at the higher pH of the upper GI tract. Specifically, a method is provided of averting or treating disease by administering to a patient susceptible to or afflicted with the disease a therapeutically effective amount of a therapeutic agent contained in the gastric controlled release formulations of the present invention.

These oral dosage forms are adapted to address problems with current therapies affecting duration of drug absorption and biovailability. The present invention therefore further provides methods of treating diseases with such dosage forms, by administering the dosage forms and compositions of this invention.

In one embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula I: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula I:

Y is selected from the group consisting of the following moieties: alkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino and heterocycloalkylamino, with the proviso that Y maybe optionally substituted with X¹¹ or X¹²;

X¹¹ is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, with the proviso that X¹¹ may be additionally optionally substituted with X¹²;

X¹² is hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, or nitro, with the proviso that said alkyl, alkoxy, and aryl may be additionally optionally substituted with moieties independently selected from X¹²;

R¹ is COR⁵, wherein R⁵ is COR⁷ wherein R⁷ is NHR⁹, wherein R⁹ is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, [CH(R^1′)]_pCOOR¹¹, [CH(R^1′)]_pCONR¹²R¹³, [CH(R^1′)]_pSO₂R¹¹, [CH(R^1′)]_pCOR¹¹, [CH(R^1′)]_pCH(OH)R¹¹, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R²)COOR¹¹, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)CONR¹²R¹³CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R²)R′, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)CONHCH(R^3′)COOR¹¹, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)CONHCH(R^3′)CONR¹²R¹³, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)CONHCH(R^3′)CONHCH(R^4′)COOR¹¹, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)CONHCH(R^3′)CONHCH(R^4′)CONR¹²R¹³, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)CONHCH(R^3′)CONHCH(R^4′)CONHCH(R^5′)COOR¹¹ and CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)CONHCH(R^3′)CONHCH(R^4′)CONHCH(R^5′)CONR¹²R¹³, wherein R^1′, R^2′, R^3′, R^4′, R^5′, R¹¹, R¹², R¹³, and R′ are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyl-aryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, aryl-alkyl and heteroaralkyl;

Z is selected from O, N, CH or CR;

W maybe present or absent, and if W is present, W is selected from C═O, C═S, C(═N—CN), or SO₂;

Q maybe present or absent, and when Q is present, Q is CH, N, P, (CH₂)_p, (CHR)_p, (CRR′)_p, O, NR, S, or SO₂; and when Q is absent, M may be present or absent; when Q and M are absent, A is directly linked to L;

A is O, CH₂, (CHR)_p, (CHR—CHR′)_p, (CRR′)_p, NR, S, SO₂ or a bond;

E is CH, N, CR, or a double bond towards A, L or G;

G may be present or absent, and when G is present, G is (CH₂)_p, (CHR)_p, or (CRR′)_p; and when G is absent, J is present and E is directly connected to the carbon atom in Formula I as G is linked to;

J maybe present or absent, and when J is present, J is (CH₂)_p, (CHR)_p, or (CRR′)_p, SO₂, NH, NR or O; and when J is absent, G is present and E is directly linked to N shown in Formula I as linked to J;

L may be present or absent, and when L is present, L is CH, CR, O, S or NR; and when L is absent, then M may be present or absent; and if M is present with L being absent, then M is directly and independently linked to E, and J is directly and independently linked to E;

M may be present or absent, and when M is present, M is O, NR, S, SO₂, (CH₂)_p, (CHR)_p(CHR—CHR′)_p, or (CRR′)_p;

p is a number from 0 to 6; and

R, R′, R², R³ and R⁴ are independently selected from the group consisting of H; C₁-C₁₀ alkyl; C₂-C₁₀ alkenyl; C₃-C₈ cycloalkyl; C₃-C₈ heterocycloalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, halogen; (cycloalkyl)alkyl and (heterocycloalkyl)alkyl, wherein said cycloalkyl is made of three to eight carbon atoms, and zero to six oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms, and said alkyl is of one to six carbon atoms; aryl; heteroaryl; alkyl-aryl; and alkyl-heteroaryl;

wherein said alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl moieties may be optionally and chemically-suitably substituted, with said term “substituted” referring to optional and chemically-suitable substitution with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, halogen, hydroxy, thio, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, sulfoxide, sulfone, sulfonyl urea, hydrazide, and hydroxamate;

further wherein said unit N-C-G-E-L-J-N represents a five-membered or six-membered cyclic ring structure with the proviso that when said unit N-C-G-E-L-J-N represents a five-membered cyclic ring structure, or when the bicyclic ring structure in Formula I comprising N, C, G, E, L, J, N, A, Q, and M represents a five-membered cyclic ring structure, then said five-membered cyclic ring structure lacks a carbonyl group as part of the cyclic ring.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula II: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula II:

Z is NH;

X is alkylsulfonyl, heterocyclylsulfonyl, heterocyclylalkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, alkylcarbonyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, heterocyclylalkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, heterocyclyloxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, heteroaryloxycarbonyl, alkyaminocarbonyl, heterocyclylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, or heteroarylaminocarbonyl moiety, with the proviso that X may be additionally optionally substituted with R¹² or R¹³;

X¹ is H; C₁-C₄ straight chain alkyl; C₁-C₄ branched alkyl or; CH₂-aryl (substituted or unsubstituted);

R¹² is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl moiety, with the proviso that R¹² may be additionally optionally substituted with R¹³.

R¹³ is hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, or nitro moiety, with the proviso that the alkyl, alkoxy, and aryl may be additionally optionally substituted with moieties independently selected from R¹³.

P1a, P1b, P2, P3, P4, P5, and P6 are independently: H; C1-C10 straight or branched chain alkyl; C2-C10 straight or branched chain alkenyl; C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C3-C8 heterocyclic; (cycloalkyl)alkyl or (heterocyclyl)alkyl, wherein said cycloalkyl is made up of 3 to 8 carbon atoms, and zero to 6 oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms, and said alkyl is of 1 to 6 carbon atoms; aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, wherein said alkyl is of 1 to 6 carbon atoms;

wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl; (cycloalkyl)alkyl and (heterocyclyl)alkyl moieties may be optionally substituted with R¹³, and further wherein said P1a and P1b may optionally be joined to each other to form a spirocyclic or spiroheterocyclic ring, with said spirocyclic or spiroheterocyclic ring containing zero to six oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms, and may be additionally optionally substituted with R¹³; and

P1′ is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyl-alkyl, aryl, aryl-alkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaryl-alkyl; with the proviso that said P1′ may be additionally optionally substituted with R¹³.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula III: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula III:

G is carbonyl;

J and Y may be the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of the moieties: H, alkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino and heterocycloalkylamino, with the proviso that Y maybe additionally optionally substituted with X¹¹ or X¹²;

X¹¹ is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl moiety, with the proviso that X¹¹ may be additionally optionally substituted with X¹²;

X¹² is hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, or nitro, with the proviso that said alkyl, alkoxy, and aryl may be additionally optionally substituted with moieties independently selected from X¹²;

R¹ is COR⁵ or C(OR)₂, wherein R⁵ is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, OR⁸, NR⁹R¹⁰, CF₃, C₂F₅, C₃F₇, CF₂R⁶, R⁶ and COR⁷ wherein R⁷ is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, OR⁸, CHR⁹R¹⁰, and NR⁹R¹⁰, wherein R⁶, R⁸, R⁹ and R¹⁰ may be the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, CH(R^1′)COOR¹¹, CH(R^1′)CONR¹²R¹³, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)COOR¹¹, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)CONR¹²R¹³, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)R′, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)CONHCH(R^3′)COOR¹¹, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)CONHCH(R^3′)CONR¹²R¹³, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)CONHCH(R^3′)CONHCH(R^4′)COOR¹¹, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)CONHCH(R^3′)CONHCH(R^4′)CONR¹²R¹³, CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)CONHCH(R^3′)CONHCH(R^4′)CONHCH(R^5′)COOR¹¹, and CH(R^1′)CONHCH(R^2′)CONHCH(R^3′)CONHCH(R^4′)CONHCH(R^5′)CONR¹²R¹³, wherein R^1′, R^2′, R^3′, R^4′, R^5′, R¹¹, R¹², R¹³, and R′ may be the same or different and are independently selected from a group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyl-aryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, aryl-alkyl and heteroaralkyl;

Z is selected from O, N, or CH;

W maybe present or absent, and if W is present, W is selected from C═O, C═S, or SO₂; and

R, R′, R², R³ and R⁴ are independently selected from the group consisting of H; C1-C10 alkyl; C2-C10 alkenyl; C3-C8 cycloalkyl; C3-C8 heterocycloalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro; oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms (with said oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms numbering zero to six); (cycloalkyl)alkyl and (heterocycloalkyl)alkyl, wherein said cycloalkyl is made of three to eight carbon atoms, and zero to six oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms, and said alkyl is of one to six carbon atoms; aryl; heteroaryl; alkyl-aryl; and alkyl-heteroaryl;

wherein said alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl moieties may be optionally substituted, with said term “substituted” referring to optional and chemically-suitable substitution with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, halogen, hydroxy, thio, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, sulfonamide, sulfoxide, sulfone, sulfonylurea, hydrazide, and hydroxamate.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula IV: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula IV: Y is selected from the group consisting of the following moieties: alkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino and heterocycloalkylamino, with the proviso that Y maybe optionally substituted with X¹¹ or X¹²; X¹¹ is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, with the proviso that X¹¹ may be additionally optionally substituted with X¹²; X¹² is hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxyl, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, or nitro, with the proviso that said alkyl, alkoxy, and aryl may be additionally optionally substituted with moieties independently selected from X¹²;

R¹ is selected from the following structures:

wherein k is a number from 0 to 5, which can be the same or different, R¹¹ denotes optional substituents, with each of said substituents being independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino, heterocycloalkylamino, hydroxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxyl, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, and nitro, with the proviso that R¹¹ (when R¹¹≠H) maybe optionally substituted with X¹¹ or X¹²;

Z is selected from O, N, CH or CR;

W may be present or absent, and if W is present, W is selected from C═O, C═S, C(═N—CN), or S(O₂);

Q may be present or absent, and when Q is present, Q is CH, N, P, (CH₂)_p, (CHR)_p, (CRR′)_p, O, N(R), S, or S(O₂); and when Q is absent, M may be present or absent;

when Q and M are absent, A is directly linked to L;

A is O, CH₂, (CHR) p, (CHR—CHR′)_p, (CRR′)_p, N(R), S, S(O₂) or a bond;

E is CH, N, CR, or a double bond towards A, L or G;

G may be present or absent, and when G is present, G is (CH₂)_p, (CHR) p, or (CRR′)_p; and when G is absent, J is present and E is directly connected to the carbon atom in Formula I as G is linked to;

J may be present or absent, and when J is present, J is (CH₂)_p, (CHR)_p, or (CRR′)_p, S(O₂), NH, N(R) or O; and when J is absent, G is present and E is directly linked to N shown in Formula I as linked to J;

L may be present or absent, and when L is present, L is CH, C(R), O, S or N(R); and when L is absent, then M may be present or absent; and if M is present with L being absent, then M is directly and independently linked to E, and J is directly and independently linked to E;

M may be present or absent, and when M is present, M is O, N(R), S, S(O₂), (CH₂)_p, (CHR)_p (CHR—CHR′)_p, or (CRR′)_p;

p is a number from 0 to 6; and

R, R′, R², R³ and R⁴ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H; C₁-C₁₀ alkyl; C₂-C₁₀ alkenyl; C₃-C₈ cycloalkyl; C₃-C₈ heterocycloalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, halogen, (cycloalkyl)alkyl and (heterocycloalkyl)alkyl, wherein said cycloalkyl is made of three to eight carbon atoms, and zero to six oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms, and said alkyl is of one to six carbon atoms; aryl; heteroaryl; alkyl-aryl; and alkyl-heteroaryl;

wherein said alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl moieties may be optionally substituted, with said term “substituted” referring to substitution with one or more moieties which can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, halogen, hydroxy, thio, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, sulfoxide, sulfone, sulfonyl urea, hydrazide, and hydroxamate;

further wherein said unit N-C-G-E-L-J-N represents a five-membered cyclic ring structure or six-membered cyclic ring structure with the proviso that when said unit N-C-G-E-L-J-N represents a five-membered cyclic ring structure, or when the bicyclic ring structure in Formula I comprising N, C, G, E, L, J, N, A, Q, and M represents a five-membered cyclic ring structure, then said five-membered cyclic ring structure lacks a carbonyl group as part of said five-membered cyclic ring.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula V: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula V: (1) R¹ is —C(O)R⁵ or −B(OR)₂; (2) R⁵ is H, —OH, —OR⁸, —NR⁹R¹⁰, —C(O)OR⁸, —C(O)NR⁹R¹⁰, —CF₃, —C₂F₅, C₃F₇, —CF₂R⁶, —R⁶, —C(O)R⁷ or NR⁷SO₂R⁸; (3) R⁷ is H, —OH, —OR⁸, or —CHR⁹R¹⁰; (4) R⁶, R⁸, R⁹ and R¹⁰ are independently selected from the group consisting of H: alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, R¹⁴, —CH(R^1′)CH(R^1′)C(O)OR¹¹, [CH(R^1′)]_pC(O)OR¹¹, —[CH(R^1′)]_pC(O)NR¹²R¹³, —[CH(R^1′)]_pS(O₂)R¹¹, —[CH(R^1′)]_pC(O)R¹¹, —[CH(R^1′)]_pS(O₂)NR¹²R¹³, CH(R^1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^2′)(R′), CH(R^1′)CH(R^1′)C(O)NR¹²R¹³, —CH(R^1′)CH(R^1′)S(O₂)R¹¹, —CH(R^1′)CH(R^1′)S(O₂)NR¹²R¹³, —CH(R^1′)CH(R^1′)C(O)R¹¹, —[CH(R^1′)]_pCH(OH)R¹¹, —CH(R^1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^2′)C(O)OR¹¹, C(O)N(H)CH(R^2′)C(O)OR¹¹, —C(O)N(H)CH(R^2′)C(O)R¹¹, CH(R^1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^2′)C(O)NR¹²R¹³, —CH(R^1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^2′)R¹¹, CH(R^1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^2′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^3′)C(O)OR¹¹, CH(R^1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^2′)C(O)CH(R^3′)NR¹²R¹³, CH(R^1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^2′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^3′)C(O)NR¹²R¹³, CH(R^1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^2′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^3′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^4′)C(O)OR¹¹, H(R^1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^2′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^3′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^4′)C(O)NR¹²R¹³, CH(R^1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^2′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^3′)C(O)N(H)CH(R⁴)C(O)N(H)CH(R^5′)C(O)OR¹¹, and CH(R^1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^2′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^3′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^4′)C(O)N(H)CH(R^5′) C(O)NR¹²R¹³; wherein R^1′, R^2′, R^3′, R^4′, R^5′, R¹¹, R¹² and R¹³ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkyl-aryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl-alkyl and heteroaralkyl; or R¹² and R¹³ are linked together wherein the combination is cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, ary or heteroaryl; R¹⁴ is present or not and if present is selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyl-aryl, allyl, alkyl-heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryl-alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl and heteroaralkyl; (5) R and R′ are present or not and if present can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of: H, OH, C₁-C₁₀ alkyl, C₂-C₁₀ alkenyl, C₃-C₈ cycloalkyl, C₃-C₈ heterocycloalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, alkylamino, arylamino, amino, amido, arylthioamino, arylcarbonylamino, arylaminocarboxy, alkylaminocarboxy, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, (aryl)alkyl, heteroarylalkyl, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, halogen, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, (alkyl)aryl, alkylheteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl and (heterocycloalkyl)alkyl, wherein said cycloalkyl is made of three to eight carbon atoms, and zero to six oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms, and said alkyl is of one to six carbon atoms; (6) L′ is H, OH, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl; (7) M′ is H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl or an amino acid side chain; or L′ and M′ are linked together to form a ring structure wherein the portion of structural Formula 1 represented by: and wherein structural Formula 2 is represented by: wherein in Formula 2: E is present or absent and if present is C, CH, N or C(R); J is present or absent, and when J is present, J is (CH₂)_p, (CHR—CHR′)_p, (CHR)_p, (CRR′)_p, S(O₂), N(H), N(R) or O; when J is absent and G is present, L is directly linked to the nitrogen atom marked position 2; p is a number from 0 to 6; L is present or absent, and when L is present, L is C(H) or C(R); when L is absent, M is present or absent; if M is present with L being absent, then M is directly and independently linked to E, and J is directly and independently linked to E; G is present or absent, and when G is present, G is (CH₂)_p, (CHR)_p, (CHR—CHR′)_p or (CRR′)_p; when G is absent, J is present and E is directly connected to the carbon atom marked position 1; Q is present or absent, and when Q is present, Q is NR, PR, (CR═CR), (CH₂)_p, (CHR)_p, (CRR′)_p, (CHR—CHR′)_p, O, NR, S, SO, or SO₂; when Q is absent, M is (i) either directly linked to A or (ii) an independent substituent on L, said independent substituent being selected from —OR, —CH(R)(R′), S(O)_0-2R or —NRR′ or (iii) absent; when both Q and M are absent, A is either directly linked to L, or A is an independent substituent on E, said independent substituent being selected from —OR, —CH(R)(R′), S(O)_0-2R or —NRR′ or A is absent; A is present or absent and if present A is O, O(R), (CH₂)_p, (CHR)_p, (CHR—CHR′)_p, (CRR′)_p, N(R), NRR′, S, S(O₂), —OR, CH(R)(R′) or NRR′; or A is linked to M to form an alicyclic, aliphatic or heteroalicyclic bridge; M is present or absent, and when M is present, M is halogen, O, OR, N(R), S, S(O₂), (CH₂)_p, (CHR)_p (CHR—CHR′)_p, or (CRR′)_p; or M is linked to A to form an alicyclic, aliphatic or heteroalicyclic bridge; (8) Z′ is represented by the structural Formula 3: wherein in Formula 3: Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, aryl, alkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, heteroalkyl-heteroaryl, heteroalkyl-heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino and heterocycloalkylamino, and Y is unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or two substituents which are the same or different and are independently selected from X¹¹ or X¹²; X¹¹ is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, and X¹¹ is unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more of X¹² moieties which are the same or different and are independently selected;

X¹² is hydroxy, alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, heteroalkylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl, sulfonylurea, cycloalkylsulfonamido, heteroaryl-cycloalkylsulfonamido, heteroaryl-sulfonamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, or nitro, and said alkyl, alkoxy, and aryl are unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties which are the same or different and are independently selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl;

Z is O, N, C(H) or C(R);

R³¹ is H, hydroxyl, aryl, alkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, heteroalkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino or heterocycloalkylamino, and R³¹ is unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or two substituents which are the same or different and are independently selected from X¹³ or X¹⁴;

X¹³ is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, and X¹³ is unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more of X¹⁴ moieties which are the same or different and are independently selected;

X¹⁴ is hydroxy, alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, heteroalkylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl, cycloalkylsulfonamido, heteroaryl-cycloalkylsulfonamido, heteroarylsulfonamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, or nitro, and said alkyl, alkoxy, and aryl are unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties which are the same or different and are independently selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl;

W may be present or absent, and if W is present, W is C(═O), C(═S), C(═N—CN), or S(O₂);

(9) X is represented by structural Formula 4: wherein in Formula 4: a is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9; b, c, d, e and f are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5; A is C, N, S or O; R²⁹ and R^29′ are independently present or absent and if present can be the same or different, each being independently one or two substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halo, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylamino, cycloalkylaminocarbonyl, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, —NH(alkyl), —NH(cycloalkyl), —N(alkyl)₂, carboxyl, C(O)O-alkyl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, alkylaryl, aralkenyl, heteroaralkyl, alkylheteroaryl, heteroaralkenyl, hydroxyalkyl, aryloxy, aralkoxy, acyl, aroyl, nitro, aryloxycarbonyl, aralkoxycarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, arylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfinyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, aralkylthio, heteroaralkylthio, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclenyl, Y₁Y₂N-alkyl-, Y₁Y₂NC(O)— and Y₁Y₂NSO₂—, wherein Y₁ and Y₂ can be the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, and aralkyl; or R²⁹ and R^29′ are linked together such that the combination is an aliphatic or heteroaliphatic chain of 0 to 6 carbons; R³⁰ is present or absent and if present is one or two substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and cylcoalkyl; (10) D is represented by structural Formula 5: wherein in Formula 5: R³², R³³ and R³⁴ are present or absent and if present are independently one or two substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halo, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylamino, spiroalkyl, cycloalkylaminocarbonyl, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, —NH(alkyl), —NH(cycloalkyl), —N(alkyl)₂, carboxyl, —C(O)O-alkyl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, alkylaryl, aralkenyl, heteroaralkyl, alkylheteroaryl, heteroaralkenyl, hydroxyalkyl, aryloxy, aralkoxy, acyl, aroyl, nitro, aryloxycarbonyl, aralkoxycarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, arylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfinyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, aralkylthio, heteroaralkylthio, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclenyl, Y₁Y₂N-alkyl-, Y₁Y₂NC(O)— and Y₁Y₂NSO₂—, wherein Y₁ and Y₂ can be the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, and aralkyl; or R³² and R³⁴ are linked together such that the combination forms a portion of a cycloalkyl group; g is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9; h, i, j, k, l and m are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5; and A is C, N, S or O, (11) provided that when structural Formula 2:

and

W′ is CH or N, both the following conditional exclusions (i) and (ii) apply:

conditional exclusion (i): Z′ is not —NH—R³⁶, wherein R³⁶ is H, C_{6 or 10} aryl, heteroaryl, —C(O)R³⁷, —C(O)OR³⁷ or —C(O)—NHR³⁷, wherein R³⁷ is C_1-6 alkyl or C_3-6 cycloalkyl;

and

conditional exclusion (ii): R¹ is not —C(O)OH, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of —C(O)OH, an ester of —C(O)OH or —C(O)NHR³⁸ wherein R³⁸ is selected from the group consisting of C_1-8 alkyl, C_3-6 cycloalkyl, C_{6 to 10} aryl or C_7-16 aralkyl.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula VI: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula VI:

Cap is H, alkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino, carboxyalkylamino, arlylalkyloxy or heterocyclylamino, wherein each of said alkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino, carboxyalkylamino, arlylalkyloxy or heterocyclylamino can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or two substituents which can be the same or different and are independently selected from X¹ and X²;

P′ is —NHR;

X¹ is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroaryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylamino, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, and X¹ can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more of X² moieties which can be the same or different and are independently selected;

X² is hydroxy, alkyl, aryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, keto, ester or nitro, wherein each of said alkyl, alkoxy, and aryl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties which can be the same or different and are independently selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroaryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylamino, alkylheteroaryl and heteroarylalkyl;

W may be present or absent, and when W is present W is C(═O), C(═S), C(═NH), C(═N—OH), C(═N—CN), S(O) or S(O₂);

Q maybe present or absent, and when Q is present, Q is N(R), P(R), CR═CR′, (CH₂)_p, (CHR)_p, (CRR′)_p, (CHR—CHR′)_p, O, S, S(O) or S(O₂); when Q is absent, M is (i) either directly linked to A or (ii) M is an independent substituent on L and A is an independent substituent on E, with said independent substituent being selected from —OR, —CH(R′), S(O)_0-2R or —NRR′; when both Q and M are absent, A is either directly linked to L, or A is an independent substituent on E, selected from —OR, CH(R)(R′), —S(O)_0-2R or —NRR′;

A is present or absent and if present A is —O—, —O(R)CH₂—, —(CHR)_p—, —(CHR—CHR′)_p—, (CRR′)_p, N(R), NRR′, S, or S(O₂), and when Q is absent, A is —OR, —CH(R)(R′) or —NRR′; and when A is absent, either Q and E are connected by a bond or Q is an independent substituent on M;

E is present or absent and if present E is CH, N, C(R);

G may be present or absent, and when G is present, G is (CH₂)_p, (CHR)_p, or (CRR′)_p; when G is absent, J is present and E is directly connected to the carbon atom marked position 1;

J may be present or absent, and when J is present, J is (CH₂)_p, (CHR—CHR′)_p, (CHR)_p, (CRR′)_p, S(O₂), N(H), N(R) or O; when J is absent and G is present, L is directly linked to the nitrogen atom marked position 2;

L may be present or absent, and when L is present, L is CH, N, or CR; when L is absent, M is present or absent; if M is present with L being absent, then M is directly and independently linked to E, and J is directly and independently linked to E;

M may be present or absent, and when M is present, M is O, N(R), S, S(O₂), (CH₂)_p, (CHR)_p, (CHR—CHR′)_p, or (CRR′)_p;

p is a number from 0 to 6;

R, R′ and R³ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of: H, C₁-C₁₀ alkyl, C₂-C₁₀ alkenyl, C₃-C₈ cycloalkyl, C₃-C₈ heterocyclyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, arylthioamino, arylcarbonylamino, arylaminocarboxy, alkylaminocarboxy, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl-alkyl, heteroarylalkyl, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, halogen, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl-aryl, alkylheteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl and (heterocyclyl)alkyl;

R and R′ in (CRR′) can be linked together such that the combination forms a cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl moiety; and

R¹ is carbonyl.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula VII:

• • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof;
  • wherein in Formula VII:
  • M is O, N(H), or CH₂;
  • n is 0-4;
  • R¹ is —OR⁶, —NR⁶R⁷ or

where R⁶ and R⁷ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, arylamino and alkylamino; R⁴ and R⁵ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl and cycloalkyl; or alternatively R⁴ and R⁵ together form part of a cyclic 5- to 7-membered ring such that the moiety is represented by where k is 0 to 2; X is selected from the group consisting of:

where p is 1 to 2, q is 1-3 and P² is alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, dialkylamino, alkylamino, arylamino or cycloalkylamino;

and

R³ is selected from the group consisting of: aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, where Y is O, S or NH, and Z is CH or N, and the R⁸ moieties can be the same or different, each R⁸ being independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, hydroxyl, amino, arylamino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, halo, alkylthio, arylthio and alkyloxy.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula VIII: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof;

wherein in Formula VIII:

M is O, N(H), or CH₂;

R¹ is —C(O)NHR⁶, where R⁶ is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, arylamino or alkylamino;

P₁ is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl haloalkyl;

P₃ is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl and cycloalkyl fused with aryl;

R⁴ and R⁵ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl and cycloalkyl; or alternatively R⁴ and R⁵ together form part of a cyclic 5- to 7-membered ring such that the moiety is represented by where k is 0 to 2;

X is selected from the group consisting of:

where p is 1 to 2, q is 1 to 3 and P² is alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, dialkylamino, alkylamino, arylamino or cycloalkylamino;

and

R³ is selected from the group consisting of: aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, where Y is O, S or NH, and Z is CH or N, and the R⁸ moieties can be the same or different, each R⁸ being independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, hydroxyl, amino, arylamino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, halo, alkylthio, arylthio and alkyloxy.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula IX: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula IX:

• • M is O, N(H), or CH₂;
  • n is 0-4;
  • R¹ is —OR⁶, —NR⁶R⁷ or

where R⁶ and R⁷ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, arylamino and alkylamino; R⁴ and R⁵ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl and cycloalkyl; or alternatively R⁴ and R⁵ together form part of a cyclic 5- to 7-membered ring such that the moiety is represented by where k is 0 to 2; X is selected from the group consisting of:

where p is 1 to 2, q is 1 to 3 and P² is alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, dialkylamino, alkylamino, arylamino or cycloalkylamino;

and

R³ is selected from the group consisting of: aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl,

where Y is O, S or NH, and Z is CH or N, and the R⁸ moieties can be the same or different, each R⁸ being independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, hydroxyl, amino, arylamino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, halo, alkylthio, arylthio and alkyloxy.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula X: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula X:

R¹ is NHR⁹, wherein R⁹ is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl;

A and M can be the same or different, each being independently selected from R, OR, NHR, NRR′, SR, SO₂R, and halo; or A and M are connected to each other such that the moiety: shown above in Formula I forms either a three, four, six, seven or eight-membered cycloalkyl, a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl, a six to ten-membered aryl, or a five to ten-membered heteroaryl;

E is C(H) or C(R);

L is C(H), C(R), CH₂C(R), or C(R)CH₂;

R, R′, R², and R³ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, cycloalkyl-, heteroalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, aryl-, heteroaryl-, (cycloalkyl)alkyl-, (heterocyclyl)alkyl-, aryl-alkyl-, and heteroaryl-alkyl-; or alternately R and R′ in NRR′ are connected to each other such that NRR′ forms a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl;

and Y is selected from the following moieties: wherein G is NH or O; and R¹⁵, R¹⁶, R¹⁷ and R¹⁸ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately, R¹⁵ and R¹⁶ are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl structure, and likewise, independently R¹⁷ and R¹⁸ are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl;

wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of: hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro.

In one embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XI: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XI:

R¹ is NHR⁹, wherein R⁹ is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl;

A and M can be the same or different, each being independently selected from R, NR⁹R¹⁰, SR, SO₂R, and halo; or A and M are connected to each other (in other words, A-E-L-M taken together) such that the moiety: shown above in Formula I forms either a three, four, six, seven or eight-membered cycloalkyl, a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl, a six to ten-membered aryl, or a five to ten-membered heteroaryl;

E is C(H) or C(R);

L is C(H), C(R), CH₂C(R), or C(R)CH₂;

R, R′, R², and R³ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, cycloalkyl-, heteroalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, aryl-, heteroaryl-, (cycloalkyl)alkyl-, (heterocyclyl)alkyl-, aryl-alkyl-, and heteroaryl-alkyl-; or alternately R and R′ in NRR′ are connected to each other such that NR⁹R¹⁰ forms a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl;

Y is selected from the following moieties:

wherein Y³⁰ and Y³¹ are selected from

where u is a number 0-6;

X is selected from O, NR¹⁵, NC(O)R¹⁶, S, S(O) and SO₂;

G is NH or O; and

R¹⁵, R¹⁶, R¹⁷, R¹⁸, R¹⁹, T₁, T₂, T₃ and T₄ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately, R¹⁷ and R¹⁸ are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl;

wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of: hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XII: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XII:

R¹ is NHR⁹, wherein R⁹ is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl;

A and M can be the same or different, each being independently selected from R, OR, NHR, NRR′, SR, SO₂R, and halo; or A and M are connected to each other such that the moiety: shown above in Formula I forms either a three, four, six, seven or eight-membered cycloalkyl, a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl, a six to ten-membered aryl, or a five to ten-membered heteroaryl;

E is C(H) or C(R);

L is C(H), C(R), CH₂C(R), or C(R)CH₂;

R, R′, R², and R³ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, cycloalkyl-, heteroalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, aryl-, heteroaryl-, (cycloalkyl)alkyl-, (heterocyclyl)alkyl-, aryl-alkyl-, and heteroaryl-alkyl-; or alternately R and R′ in NRR′ are connected to each other such that NRR′ forms a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl;

and Y is selected from the following moieties: wherein G is NH or O; and R¹⁵, R¹⁶, R¹⁷, R¹⁸, and R¹⁹ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately, (i) either R¹⁵ and R¹⁶ are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered cyclic structure, or R¹⁵ and R¹⁹ are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered cyclic structure, and (ii) likewise, independently, R¹⁷ and R¹⁸ are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl;

wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of: hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XIII: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XIII:

R¹ is NHR⁹, wherein R⁹ is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl;

A and M can be the same or different, each being independently selected from R, OR, NHR, NRR′, SR, SO₂R, and halo; or A and M are connected to each other (in other words, A-E-L-M taken together) such that the moiety: shown above in Formula I forms either a three, four, six, seven or eight-membered cycloalkyl, a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl, a six to ten-membered aryl, or a five to ten-membered heteroaryl;

E is C(H) or C(R);

L is C(H), C(R), CH₂C(R), or C(R)CH₂;

R, R′, R², and R³ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, cycloalkyl-, heteroalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, aryl-, heteroaryl-, (cycloalkyl)alkyl-, (heterocyclyl)alkyl-, aryl-alkyl-, and heteroaryl-alkyl-; or alternately R and R′ in NRR′ are connected to each other such that NRR′ forms a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; and Y is selected from the following moieties: wherein G is NH or O, and R¹⁵, R¹⁶, R¹⁷, R¹⁸, R¹⁹ and R²⁰ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₁₀ alkyl, C₁-C₁₀ heteroalkyl, C₂-C₁₀ alkenyl, C₂-C₁₀ heteroalkenyl, C₂-C₁₀ alkynyl, C₂-C₁₀ heteroalkynyl, C₃-C₈ cycloalkyl, C₃-C₈ heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alternately: (i) either R¹⁵ and R¹⁶ can be connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl, or R¹⁵ and R¹⁹ are connected to each other to form a five to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl, or R¹⁵ and R²⁰ are connected to each other to form a five to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl, and (ii) likewise, independently, R¹⁷ and R¹⁸ are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl,

wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of: hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XIV: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XIV:

R¹ is NHR⁹, wherein R⁹ is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl;

A and M can be the same or different, each being independently selected from R, OR, NHR, NRR′, SR, SO₂R, and halo; or A and M are connected to each other such that the moiety: shown above in Formula I forms either a three, four, six, seven or eight-membered cycloalkyl, a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl, a six to ten-membered aryl, or a five to ten-membered heteroaryl;

E is C(H) or C═;

L is C(H), C═, CH₂C═, or C═CH₂;

R, R′, R², and R³ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately R and R′ in NRR′ are connected to each other such that NRR′ forms a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl;

and Y is selected from the following moieties:

wherein G is NH or O; and R¹⁵, R¹⁶, R¹⁷ and R¹⁸ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl, or alternately, (i) R¹⁵ and R¹⁶ are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered cyclic structure, and (ii) likewise, independently R¹⁷ and R¹⁸ are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl;

wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of: hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XV: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XV:

R¹ is NHR⁹, wherein R⁹ is H, alkyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, cycloalkyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl;

E and J can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of R, OR, NHR, NRR⁷, SR, halo, and S(O₂)R, or E and J can be directly connected to each other to form either a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl, or a three to eight-membered heterocyclyl moiety;

Z is N(H), N®, or O, with the proviso that when Z is O, G is present or absent and if G is present with Z being O, then G is C(═O);

G maybe present or absent, and if G is present, G is C(═O) or S(O₂), and when G is absent, Z is directly connected to Y;

Y is selected from the group consisting of:

R, R⁷, R², R³, R⁴ and R⁵ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, cycloalkyl-, heteroalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, aryl-, heteroaryl-, (cycloalkyl)alkyl-, (heterocyclyl)alkyl-, aryl-alkyl-, and heteroaryl-alkyl-, wherein each of said heteroalkyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl independently has one to six oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms;

wherein each of said alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl and heterocyclyl moieties can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, halo, hydroxy, thio, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, sulfoxide, sulfone, sulfonyl urea, hydrazide, and hydroxamate.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XVI: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XVI:

R¹ is NHR⁹, wherein R⁹ is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl;

R² and R³ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl;

Y is selected from the following moieties:

wherein G is NH or O; and R¹⁵, R¹⁶, R¹⁷, R¹⁸, R¹⁹, R²⁰, R²¹, R²², R²³, R²⁴ and R²⁵ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternatively (i) R¹⁷ and R¹⁸ are independently connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl; (ii) likewise independently R¹⁵ and R¹⁹ are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; (iii) likewise independently R¹⁵ and R¹⁶ are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; (iv) likewise independently R¹⁵ and R¹⁹ are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; (v) likewise independently R²² and R²³ are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; and (vi) likewise independently R²⁴ and R²⁵ are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl;

wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XVII: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XVII:

R¹ is NHR⁹, wherein R⁹ is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl;

A and M can be the same or different, each being independently selected from R, OR, NHR, NRR′, SR, SO₂R, and halo; or A and M are connected to each other such that the moiety: shown above in Formula I forms either a three, four, six, seven or eight-membered cycloalkyl, a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl, a six to ten-membered aryl, or a five to ten-membered heteroaryl;

E is C(H) or C═;

L is C(H), C═, CH₂C═, or C═CH₂;

R, R′, R², and R³ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, cycloalkyl-, heteroalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, aryl-, heteroaryl-, (cycloalkyl)alkyl-, (heterocyclyl)alkyl-, aryl-alkyl-, and heteroaryl-alkyl-; or alternately R and R′ in NRR′ are connected to each other such that NRR′ forms a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl;

Y is selected from the following moieties:

wherein Y³⁰ is selected from

where u is a number 0-1;

X is selected from O, NR¹⁵, NC(O)R¹⁶, S, S(O) and SO₂;

G is NH or O; and

R¹⁵, R¹⁶, R¹⁷, R¹⁸, R¹⁹, T₁, T₂, and T₃ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately, R¹⁷ and R¹⁸ are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl;

wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of: hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XVIII: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XVIII: R⁸ is selected from the group consisting of alkyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, heteroarylalkyl-, and heterocyclylalkyl; R⁹ is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl and cycloalkyl; A and M can be the same or different, each being independently selected from R, OR, N(H)R, N(RR′), SR, S(O₂)R, and halo; or A and M are connected to each other (in other words, A-E-L-M taken together) such that the moiety:

shown above in Formula I forms either a three, four, five, six, seven or eight-membered cycloalkyl, a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl, a six to ten-membered aryl, or a five to ten-membered heteroaryl;

E is C(H) or C(R);

L is C(H), C(R), CH₂C(R), or C(R)CH₂;

R and R′ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, cycloalkyl-, heteroalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, aryl-, heteroaryl-, (cycloalkyl)alkyl-, (heterocyclyl)alkyl-, aryl-alkyl-, and heteroaryl-alkyl-; or alternately R and R′ in N(RR′) are connected to each other such that N(RR′) forms a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl;

R² and R³ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, spiro-linked cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl;

Y is selected from the following moieties:

wherein G is NH or O; and R¹⁵, R¹⁶, R¹⁷, R¹⁸, R¹⁹ and R²⁰ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately (i) R¹⁷ and R¹⁸ are independently connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl; (ii) likewise independently R¹⁵ and R¹⁹ are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; (iii) likewise independently R¹⁵ and R¹⁶ are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; and (iv) likewise independently R¹⁵ and R²⁰ are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl;

wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, spiro-linked cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XIX: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XIX:

Z is selected from the group consisting of a heterocyclyl moiety, N(H)(alkyl), —N(alkyl)₂, —N(H)(cycloalkyl), —N(cycloalkyl)₂, —N(H)(aryl, —N(aryl)₂, —N(H)(heterocyclyl), —N(heterocyclyl)₂, —N(H)(heteroaryl), and —N(heteroaryl)₂;

R¹ is NHR⁹, wherein R⁹ is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl;

R² and R³ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl;

Y is selected from the following moieties:

wherein G is NH or O; and R¹⁵, R¹⁶, R¹⁷, R¹⁸, R¹⁹, R²⁰ and R²¹ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately (i) R¹⁷ and R¹⁸ are independently connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl; (ii) likewise independently R¹⁵ and R¹⁹ are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; (iii) likewise independently R¹⁵ and R¹⁶ are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; and (iv) likewise independently R¹⁵ and R²⁰ are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl;

wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XX: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XX: a is 0 or 1; b is 0 or 1; Y is H or C_1-6alkyl; B is H, an acyl derivative of formula R₇—C(O)— or a sulfonyl of formula R₇—SO2 wherein R7 is

• • (i) C_1-10 alkyl optionally substituted with carboxyl, C_1-6 alkanoyloxy or C_1-6 alkoxy;
  • (ii) C_3-7 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with carboxyl, (C_1-6 alkoxy)carbonyl or phenylmethoxycarbonyl;
  • (iii) C₆ or C₁₀ aryl or C_7-16 aralkyl optionally substituted with C_1-6 alkyl, hydroxy, or amino optionally substituted with C_1-6 alkyl; or
  • (iv) Het optionally substituted with C_1-6 alkyl, hydroxy, amino optionally substituted with C_1-6 alkyl, or amido optionally substituted with C_1-6 alkyl; R₆, when present, is C_1-6 alkyl substituted with carboxyl; R₅, when present, is C_1-6alkyl optionally substituted with carboxyl; R₄ is C_1-10 alkyl, C_3-7 cycloalkyl or C_4-10 (alkylcycloalkyl); R₃ is C_1-10 alkyl, C_3-7 cycloalkyl or C_4-10 (alkylcycloalkyl); R₂ is CH₂—R₂₀, NH—R₂₀, 0-R₂₀ or S—R₂₀, wherein R₂₀ is a saturated or unsaturated C_3-7 cycloalkyl or C_4-10 (alkyl cycloalkyl) being optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with R₂₁, or R₂₀ is a C₆ or C₁₀ aryl or C_7-16 aralkyl optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with R₂₁, or R₂₀ is Het or (lower alkyl)-Het optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with R₂₁, wherein each R₂₁ is independently C_1-6 alkyl; C_1-6alkoxy; amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C_1-6 alkyl; sulfonyl; NO₂; OH; SH; halo; haloalkyl; amido optionally mono-substituted with C_1-6 alkyl, C₆ or C₁₀ aryl, C_7-16 aralkyl, Het or (lower alkyl)-Het; carboxyl; carboxy(lower alkyl); C₆ or C₁₀ aryl, C_7-16 aralkyl or Het, said aryl, aralkyl or Het being optionally substituted with R₂₂; wherein R₂₂ is C_1-6alkyl; C_1-6 alkoxy; amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C_1-6 alkyl; sulfonyl; NO₂; OH; SH; halo; haloalkyl; carboxyl; amide or (lower alkyl)amide; R₁ is C_1-6 alkyl or C_2-6 alkenyl optionally substituted with halogen; and W is hydroxy or a N-substituted amino.

In the above-shown structure of the compound of Formula XX, the terms P6, P5, P4, P3, P2 and P1 denote the respective amino acid moieties as is conventionally known to those skilled in the art.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XXI: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XXI: B is H, a C₆ or C₁₀ aryl, C_7-16 aralkyl; Het or (lower alkyl)-Het, all of which optionally substituted with C_1-6 alkyl; C_1-6 alkoxy; C_1-6 alkanoyl; hydroxy; hydroxyalkyl; halo; haloalkyl; nitro; cyano; cyanoalkyl; amino optionally substituted with C_1-6 alkyl; amido; or (lower alkyl)amide; or B is an acyl derivative of formula R₄—C(O)—; a carboxyl of formula R₄-0-C(O)—; an amide of formula R₄—N(R₅)—C(O)—; a thioamide of formula R₄—N(R₅)—C(S)—; or a sulfonyl of formula R₄—SO2 wherein

R₄ is (i) C_1-10 alkyl optionally substituted with carboxyl, C_1-6 alkanoyl, hydroxy, C_1-6 alkoxy, amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C_1-6 alkyl, amido, or (lower alkyl) amide;

(ii) C_3-7 cycloalkyl, C_3-7 cycloalkoxy, or C_4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, all optionally substituted with hydroxy, carboxyl, (C_1-6 alkoxy)carbonyl, amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C_1-6 alkyl, amido, or (lower alkyl) amide;

(iii) amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C_1-6 alkyl; amido; or (lower alkyl)amide;

(iv) C₆ or C₁₀ aryl or C_7-16 aralkyl, all optionally substituted with C_1-6 alkyl, hydroxy, amido, (lower alkyl)amide, or amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C_1-6 alkyl; or

(v) Het or (lower alkyl)-Het, both optionally substituted with C_1-6 alkyl, hydroxy, amido, (lower alkyl) amide, or amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C_1-6 alkyl;

R₅ is H or C_1-6 alkyl;

with the proviso that when R₄ is an amide or a thioamide, R₄ is not (ii) a cycloalkoxy;

Y is H or C_1-6 alkyl;

R₃ is C_1-8 alkyl, C_3-7 cycloalkyl, or C_4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, all optionally substituted with hydroxy, C_1-6 alkoxy, C_1-6 thioalkyl, amido, (lower alkyl)amido, C₆ or C₁₀ aryl, or C_7-16 aralkyl;

R₂ is CH₂—R₂₀, NH—R₂₀, O—R₂₀ or S—R₂₀, wherein R₂₀ is a saturated or unsaturated C_3-7 cycloalkyl or C_4-10 (alkylcycloalkyl), all of which being optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with R₂₁, or R₂₀ is a C₆ or C₁₀ aryl or C_7-14 aralkyl, all optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with R₂₁,

or R₂₀ is Het or (lower alkyl)-Het, both optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with R₂₁,

wherein each R₂₁ is independently C_1-6 alkyl; C_1-6 alkoxy; lower thioalkyl; sulfonyl; NO₂; OH; SH; halo; haloalkyl; amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C_1-6 alkyl, C₆ or C₁₀ aryl, C_7-14 aralkyl, Het or (lower alkyl)-Het; amido optionally mono-substituted with C_1-6 alkyl, C₆ or C₁₀ aryl, C_7-14 aralkyl, Het or (lower alkyl)-Het; carboxyl; carboxy(lower alkyl); C₆ or C₁₀ aryl, C_7-14 aralkyl or Het, said aryl, aralkyl or Het being optionally substituted with R₂₂;

wherein R₂₂ is C_1-6 alkyl; C_3-7 cycloalkyl; C_1-6 alkoxy; amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C_1-6 alkyl; sulfonyl; (lower alkyl)sulfonyl; NO₂; OH; SH; halo; haloalkyl; carboxyl; amide; (lower alkyl)amide; or Het optionally substituted with C_1-6 alkyl;

R1 is H; C_1-6 alkyl, C_3-7 cycloalkyl, C_2-6 alkenyl, or C_2-6 alkynyl, all optionally substituted with halogen.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XXII: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XXII: W is CH or N, R²¹ is H, halo, C_1-6 alkyl, C_3-6 cycloalkyl, C_1-6 haloalkyl, C_1-6alkoxy, C_3-6 cycloalkoxy, hydroxy, or N(R²³)₂, wherein each R²³ is independently H, C_1-6 alkyl or C_3-6 cycloalkyl; R²² is H, halo, C_1-6 alkyl, C_3-6 cycloalkyl, C_1-6 haloalkyl, C_1-6 thioalkyl, C_1-6 alkoxy, C_3-6 cycloalkoxy, C_2-7 alkoxyalkyl, C_3-6 cycloalkyl, C_{6 or 10} aryl or Het, wherein Het is a five-, six-, or seven-membered saturated or unsaturated heterocycle containing from one to four heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur; said cycloalkyl, aryl or Het being substituted with R²⁴, wherein R²⁴ is H, halo, C_1-6 alkyl, C_3-6 cycloalkyl, C_1-6 alkoxy, C_3-6 cycloalkoxy, NO₂, N(R²⁵)₂, NH—C(O)—R²⁵ or NH—C(O)—NH—R²⁵, wherein each R²⁵ is independently: H, C_1-6 alkyl or C_3-6 cycloalkyl; or R²⁴ is NH—C(O)—OR²⁶ wherein R²⁶ is C_1-6 alkyl or C_3-6 cycloalkyl; R³ is hydroxy, NH₂, or a group of formula —NH—R³¹ wherein R³¹ is C_{6 or 10} aryl, heteroaryl, —C(O)—R³², —C(O)—NHR³² or —C(O)—OR³², wherein R³² is C_1-6 alkyl or C_3-6 cycloalkyl; D is a 5 to 10-atom saturated or unsaturated alkylene chain optionally containing one to three heteroatoms independently selected from: O, S, or N—R⁴¹, wherein R⁴¹ is H, C_1-6 alkyl, C_3-6 cycloalkyl or —C(O)—R⁴², wherein R⁴² is C_1-6 alkyl, C_3-6 cycloalkyl or C_{6 or 10} aryl; R⁴ is H or from one to three substituents at any carbon atom of said chain D, said substituent independently selected from the group consisting of: C_1-6 alkyl, C_1-6 haloalkyl, C_1-6 alkoxy, hydroxy, halo, amino, oxo, thio and C1-6 thioalkyl, and A is an amide of formula —C(O)—NH—R⁵, wherein R⁵ is selected from the group consisting of: C_1-8 alkyl, C_3-6 cycloalkyl, C_{6 or 10} aryl and C_7-16 aralkyl; or A is a carboxylic acid.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XXIII: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XXIII: R⁰ is a bond or difluoromethylene; R¹ is hydrogen; R² and R⁹ are each independently optionally substituted aliphatic group, optionally substituted cyclic group or optionally substituted aromatic group; R3, R5 and R7 are each independently:

optionally substituted (1,1- or 1,2-)cycloalkylene; or

optionally substituted (1,1- or 1,2-)heterocyclylene; or

methylene or ethylene), substituted with one substituent selected from the group consisting of an optionally substituted aliphatic group, an optionally substituted cyclic group or an optionally substituted aromatic group, and wherein the methylene or ethylene is further optionally substituted with an aliphatic group substituent; or; R4, R6, R8 and R¹⁰ are each independently hydrogen or optionally substituted aliphatic group; is substituted monocyclic azaheterocyclyl or optionally substituted multicyclic azaheterocyclyl, or optionally substituted multicyclic azaheterocyclenyl wherein the unsaturatation is in the ring distal to the ring bearing the R⁹-L-(N(R⁸)—R⁷—C(O)—)_nN(R⁶)—R⁵—C(O)—N moiety and to which the —C(O)—N(R⁴)—R³—C(O)C(O)NR²R¹ moiety is attached; L is —C(O)—, —OC(O)—, —NR¹⁰C(O)—, —S(0)₂-, or —NR¹⁰S(0)₂-; and n is 0 or 1, provided when is substituted then L is —OC(O)— and R⁹ is optionally substituted aliphatic; or at least one of R³, R⁵ and R⁷ is ethylene, substituted with one substituent selected from the group consisting of an optionally substituted aliphatic group, an optionally substituted cyclic group or an optionally substituted aromatic group and wherein the ethylene is further optionally substituted with an aliphatic group substituent; or R⁴ is optionally substituted aliphatic.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XXIV: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XXIV: W is:

m is 0 or 1;

R² is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, aralkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkenylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl; wherein any R² carbon atom is optionally substituted with J;

J is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, aralkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, heterocyclylalkyl, keto, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, alkanoylamino, aroylamino, aralkanoylamino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxamidoalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, formyl, acyl, sulfonyl, or sulfonamido and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J¹ groups;

J¹ is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, keto, hydroxy, amino, alkanoylamino, aroylamino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxamidoalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, formyl, sulfonyl, or sulfonamido;

L is alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl, wherein any hydrogen is optionally substituted with halogen, and wherein any hydrogen or halogen atom bound to any terminal carbon atom is optionally substituted with sulfhydryl or hydroxy;

A¹ is a bond;

R⁴ is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, carboxyalkyl, or carboxamidoalkyl, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups;

R⁵ and R⁶ are independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, aralkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups;

X is a bond, —C(H)(R7)-, -0-, —S—, or —N(R8)-;

R⁷ is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups;

R⁸ is hydrogen alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, aralkanoyl, heterocyclanoyl, heteroaralkanoyl, —C(O)R¹⁴, —S0₂R¹⁴, or carboxamido, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups; or R⁸ and Z, together with the atoms to which they are bound, form a nitrogen containing mono- or bicyclic ring system optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups;

R¹⁴ is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl;

Y is a bond, —CH₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)C(O)—, —S(O)—, —S(0)₂-, or —S(O)(NR⁷)—, wherein R⁷ is as defined above;

Z is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, —OR², or —N(R²)₂, wherein any carbon atom is optionally substituted with J, wherein R² is as defined above;

A² is a bond or

R⁹ is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, carboxyalkyl, or carboxamidoalkyl, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups;

M is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, optionally substituted by 1-3 J groups, wherein any alkyl carbon atom may be replaced by a heteroatom;

V is a bond, —CH₂—, —C(H)(R¹¹)—, -0-, —S—, or —N(R¹¹)—;

R¹¹ is hydrogen or C_1-3 alkyl;

K is a bond, -0-, —S—, —C(O)—, —S(O)—, —S(0)₂-, or —S(O)(NR¹¹)—, wherein R¹¹ is as defined above;

T is —R¹², -alkyl-R¹², -alkenyl-R¹², -alkynyl-R¹², —OR¹², —N(R¹²)₂, —C(O)R¹², —C(═NOalkyl)R¹², or

R¹² is hydrogen, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkylidenyl, or heterocycloalkylidenyl, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups, or a first R¹² and a second R¹², together with the nitrogen to which they are bound, form a mono- or bicyclic ring system optionally substituted by 1-3 J groups;

R¹⁰ is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, carboxyalkyl, or carboxamidoalkyl, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 hydrogens J groups;

R¹⁵ is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, carboxyalkyl, or carboxamidoalkyl, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups; and

R¹⁶ is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XXV: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XXV:

E represents CHO or B(OH)₂;

R¹ represents lower alkyl, halo-lower alkyl, cyano-lower alkyl, lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, aryl-lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, aryl-lower alkyl, heteroaryllower alkyl, lower alkenyl or lower alkynyl;

R² represents lower alkyl, hydroxy-lower alkyl, carboxylower alkyl, aryl-lower alkyl, aminocarbonyl-lower alkyl or lower cycloalkyl-lower alkyl; and

R³ represents hydrogen or lower alkyl;

or R² and R³ together represent di- or trimethylene optionally substituted by hydroxy;

R⁴ represents lower alkyl, hydroxy-lower alkyl, lower cycloalkyl-lower alkyl, carboxy-lower alkyl, aryllower alkyl, lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, cyano-lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, aryl-lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, aryl or lower cycloalkyl;

R⁵ represents lower alkyl, hydroxy-lower alkyl, lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, aryl-lower alkyl, aryl-lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, cyano-lower alkylthio-lower alkyl or lower cycloalkyl;

R⁶ represents hydrogen or lower alkyl;

R⁷ represent lower alkyl, hydroxydower alkyl, carboxylower alkyl, aryl-lower alkyl, lower cycloalkyl-lower alkyl or lower cycloalkyl;

R⁸ represents lower alkyl, hydroxy-lower alkyl, carboxylower alkyl or aryl-lower alkyl; and

R⁹ represents lower alkylcarbonyl, carboxy-lower alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, lower alkylsulphonyl, arylsulphonyl, lower alkoxycarbonyl or aryl-lower alkoxycarbonyl.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XXVI: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XXVI:

B is an acyl derivative of formula R₁₁—C(O)— wherein R₁₁ is Cl-10 alkyl optionally substituted with carboxyl; or R₁₁ is C₆ or C₁₀ aryl or C_7-16 aralkyl optionally substituted with a C_1-6 alkyl;

a is 0 or 1;

R₆, when present, is carboxy(lower)alkyl;

b is 0 or 1;

R₅, when present, is C_1-6 alkyl, or carboxy(lower)alkyl;

Y is H or C_1-6 alkyl;

R₄ is C_1-10 alkyl; C_3-10 cycloalkyl;

R₃ is C1-10 alkyl; C_3-10 cycloalkyl;

W is a group of formula:

wherein R₂ is C_1-10 alkyl or C_3-7 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with carboxyl; C₆ or C₁₀ aryl; or C_7-16 aralkyl; or

W is a group of formula:

wherein X is CH or N; and

R₂′ is C_3-4 alkylene that joins X to form a 5- or 6-membered ring, said ring optionally substituted with OH; SH; NH2; carboxyl; R₁₂; OR₁₂, SR₁₂, NHR₁₂ or NR₁₂R₁₂′ wherein R₁₂ and R₁₂′ are independently:

cyclic C_3-16 alkyl or acyclic C_1-16 alkyl or cyclic C_3-16 alkenyl or acyclic C_2-16 alkenyl, said alkyl or alkenyl optionally substituted with NH₂, OH, SH, halo, or carboxyl; said alkyl or alkenyl optionally containing at least one heteroatom selected independently from the group consisting of: 0, S, and N; or

R₁₂ and R₁₂′ are independently C₆ or C₁₀ aryl or C_7-16 aralkyl optionally substituted with C_1-6 alkyl, NH₂, OH, SH, halo, carboxyl or carboxy(lower)alkyl; said aryl or aralkyl optionally containing at least one heteroatom selected independently from the group consisting of: O, S, and N;

said cyclic alkyl, cyclic alkenyl, aryl or aralkyl being optionally fused with a second 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring to form a cyclic system or heterocycle, said second ring being optionally substituted with NH₂. OH, SH, halo, carboxyl or carboxy(lower)alkyl; C₆ or C₁₀ aryl, or heterocycle; said second ring optionally containing at least one heteroatom selected independently from the group consisting of: 0, S, and N;

Q is a group of the formula:

wherein Z is CH;

X is 0 or S;

R₁ is H, C_1-6 alkyl or C_1-6 alkenyl both optionally substituted with thio or halo; and

R₁₃ is C0-NH—R₁₄ wherein R₁₄ is hydrogen, cyclic C_3-10 alkyl or acyclic C_1-10 alkyl or cyclic C_3-10 alkenyl or acyclic C_2-10 alkenyl, said alkyl or alkenyl optionally substituted with NH₂, OH, SH, halo or carboxyl; said alkyl or alkenyl optionally containing at least one heteroatom selected independently from the group consisting of: 0, S, and N; or

R₁₄ is C₆ or C₁₀ aryl or C_7-16 aralkyl optionally substituted with C_1-6 alkyl, NH₂, OH, SH, halo, carboxyl or carboxy(lower)alkyl or substituted with a further C_3-7 cycloalkyl, C₆ or C₁₀ aryl, or heterocycle; said aryl or aralkyl optionally containing at least one heteroatom selected independently from the group consisting of: 0, S, and N;

said cyclic alkyl, cyclic alkenyl, aryl or aralkyl being optionally fused with a second 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring to form a cyclic system or heterocycle, said second ring being optionally substituted with NH₂, OH, SH, halo, carboxyl or carboxy(lower)alkyl or substituted with a further C_3-7 cycloalkyl, C₆ or C₁₀ aryl, or heterocycle; said second ring optionally containing at least one heteroatom selected independently from the group consisting of: O, S, and N;

with the proviso that when Z is CH, then R₁₃ is not an α-amino acid or an ester thereof;

Q is a phosphonate group of the formula:

wherein R₁₅ and R₁₆ are independently Cr_6-20 aryloxy; and R₁, is as defined above.

In the above-shown structure of the compound of Formula XXVI, the terms P6, P5, P4, P3, P2 and P1 denote the respective amino acid moieties as is conventionally known to those skilled in the art. Thus, the actual structure of the compound of Formula XXVI is:

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XXVII: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof.

In another embodiment, the “at least one compound” is a compound of structural Formula XXVIII: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof.

In one embodiment, the compound of structural Formula XXVIII is a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof.

In a preferred embodiment, the “at least one compound” is administered in an amount of about 1 mg to about 4000 mg per day.

In another embodiment, the compound is selected from the group consisting of: a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof, or a mixture of two or more thereof.

Methods of treating, preventing and/or ameliorating disorders associated with HCV in a subject comprising administering to a subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of at least one of the “inventive compounds” are also provided.

Methods of treating and/or reducing the signs and/or symptoms associated with HCV in a subject comprising administering to a subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of at least one of the inventive compounds are also provided.

Methods of treating a wide variety of diseases/disorders associated with cathepsin activity and/or for inhibiting cathepsin activity in a subject comprising administering to a subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of at least one of the inventive compounds also are provided.

One example of such disorders is proliferative diseases, such as cancer, autoimmune diseases, viral diseases, fungal diseases, neurological/neurodegenerative disorders, arthritis, inflammation, anti-proliferative (e.g., ocular retinopathy), neuronal, alopecia and cardiovascular disease. Many of these diseases and disorders are listed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,413,974, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein.

Another example of a disease that can be treated by the present compounds is an inflammatory disease, such as organ transplant rejection, graft v. host disease, arthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, atopic dermatitis, psoriasis, asthma, allergies, multiple sclerosis, fixed drug eruptions, cutaneous delayed-type hypersentitivity responses, tuberculoid leprosy, type I diabetes, and viral meningitis.

Another example of a disease that can be treated by the present compounds is a cardiovascular disease.

Another example of a disease that can be treated by the present compounds is a central nervous system disease, such as depression, cognitive function disease, neurodegenerative disease such as Parkinson's disease, senile dementia such as Alzheimer's disease, and psychosis of organic origin.

Other examples of diseases that can be treated by the present compounds are diseases characterized by bone loss, such as osteoporosis; gingival diseases, such as gingivitis and periodontitis; and diseases characterized by excessive cartilage or matrix degradation, such as osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis.

Other than in the operating examples, or where otherwise indicated, all numbers expressing quantities of ingredients, reaction conditions, and so forth used in the specification and claims are to be understood as being modified in all instances by the term “about.”

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

The invention is further illustrated by the following drawings in which:

FIG. 1 is a graph of mean viral load measured over time with administration of various doses and regimens of a compound of Formula Ia; and

FIG. 2 is a box plot showing serum levels of a compound of Formula Ia measured on day 14 at various times when a compound of Formula Ia is administered twice per day (bid, left box) and when a compound of Formula Ia is administered three times per day (tid, right box).

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The present invention is directed to controlled-release dosage formulations and methods of treatment using the same. The formulations comprise at least one (one or more) compounds of Formulae I to XXVIII as discussed above and a controlled-release carrier. One of ordinary skill in the medicinal art will readily appreciate the potential advantages of controlled-release dosage formulations, namely, enhanced delivery to the required site, delivery at the required rate, fewer administrations that increases patient compliance, reduced dangers of overdose or side effects; and also economic advantages by virtue of more efficient dosage, at the expense of possibly more complicated fabrication.

Suitable compounds of Formula I are disclosed in PCT International publication WO03/062265 published Jul. 31, 2003. Non-limiting examples of certain compounds disclosed in this publication include those listed at pages 48-75, incorporated herein by reference, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof.

In one embodiment, at least one compound is: a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof, or a mixture of two or more thereof.

The compound of Formula Ia has recently been separated into its isomer/diastereomers of Formula Ib and Ic, as disclosed in U.S. Patent Publication US2005/0249702 published Nov. 10, 2005. In one embodiment, at least one compound is Formula Ic (a potent inhibitor of HCV NS3 serine protease), a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof, or a mixture of two or more thereof. The chemical name of the compound of Formula Ic is (1R,2S,5S)—N-[(1S)-3-amino-1-(cyclobutyl methyl)-2,3-dioxopropyl]-3-[(2S)-2-[[[(1,1-dimethylethyl)amino]carbonyl]amino]-3,3-dimethyl-1-oxobutyl]-6,6-dimethyl-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-2-carboxamide.

Processes for making compounds of Formula I are disclosed in U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2005/0059648, 2005/0020689 and 2005/0059800, incorporated by reference herein.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula II and methods of making the same are disclosed in WO02/08256 and in U.S. Pat. No. 6,800,434, at col. 5 through col. 247, incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula III and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO02/08187 and in U.S. Patent Publication 2002/0160962 at page 3, paragraph 22 through page 132, incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula IV and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO03/062228 and in U.S. Patent Publication 2003/0207861 at page 3, paragraph 25 through page 26, incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula V and methods of making the same are disclosed in U.S. Patent Publication 2005/0119168 at page 3 paragraph [0024], through page 215, paragraph [0833], incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula VI and methods of making the same are disclosed in U.S. Patent Publication Ser. No. 2005/0085425 at page 3, paragraph 0023 through page 139, incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula VII, VIII, and IX as well as methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO 2005/051980 and in U.S. Patent Publication 2005/0164921 at page 3, paragraph [0026] through page 113, paragraph [0271], incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula X and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO2005/085275 and in U.S. Patent Publication 2005/0267043 at page 4, paragraph [0026] through page 519, paragraph [0444], incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XI and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO2005/087721 and in U.S. Patent Publication 2005/0288233 at page 3, paragraph [0026] through page 280, paragraph [0508], incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XII and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO2005/087725 and in U.S. Patent Publication 2005/0245458 at page 4, paragraph [0026] through page 194, paragraph [0374], incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XIII and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO2005/085242 and in U.S. Patent Publication 2005/0222047 at page 3, paragraph [0026] through page 209, paragraph [0460], incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XIV and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO2005/087731 at page 8, line 20 through page 683, line 6, incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XV and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO2005/058821 and in U.S. Patent Publication 2005/0153900 at page 4, paragraph [0028] through page 83, paragraph [0279], incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XVI and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO2005/087730 and in U.S. Patent Publication 2005/0197301 at page 3, paragraph [0026] through page 156, paragraph [0312], incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XVII and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO2005/085197 and in U.S. Patent Publication 2005/0209164 at page 3, paragraph [0026] through page 87, paragraph [0354], incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XVIII and methods of making the same are disclosed in U.S. Patent Publication 2006/0046956 at page 4, paragraph [0024] through page 50, paragraph [0282], incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XIX and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO2005/113581 and in U.S. Patent Publication 2005/0272663 at page 3, paragraph [0026] through page 76, incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XX and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO2000/09558 at page 4, line 17 through page 85, incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XXI and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO2000/09543 at page 4, line 14 through page 124, incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XXII and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO2000/59929 and in U.S. Pat. No. 6,608,027, at col. 65, line 65 through col. 141, line 20, each incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XXIII and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO02/18369 at page 4, line 4 through page 311, incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XXIV and methods of making the same are disclosed in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2002/0032175, 2004/0266731 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,265,380 at col. 3, line 35 through col. 121 and 6,617,309 at col. 3, line 40 through col. 121, each incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XXV and methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO1998/22496 at page 3 through page 122, incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XXVI and methods of making the same are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,143,715 at col. 3, line 6 through col. 62, line 20, incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of suitable compounds of Formula XXVII and Formula XXVIII as well as methods of making the same are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO02/18369 at page 4, line 4 through page 311, incorporated herein by reference. More specifically, see International Patent Publication WO02/18369, Examples 17, 27, 86, and 126, incorporated herein by reference. In particular, for compound XXVII, see WO02/18369, Example 27 on pages 146-153 which details methods of making compound “CU” illustrated at page 90, and Example 126 which details methods of making the intermediate compound cxxxviii at page 225. Likewise, for compound XXVIIIa, see WO02/18369, Example 17 on pages 139-140 which details methods of making compound “BW” illustrated at page 52, and Example 86 which details methods of making the intermediate compound lxxxix at page 207.

Isomers of the various compounds of the present invention (where they exist), including enantiomers, stereoisomers, rotamers, tautomers and racemates are also contemplated as being part of this invention. The invention includes d and l isomers in both pure form and in admixture, including racemic mixtures. Isomers can be prepared using conventional techniques, either by reacting optically pure or optically enriched starting materials or by separating isomers of a compound of the present invention. Isomers may also include geometric isomers, e.g., when a double bond is present. Polymorphous forms of the compounds of the present invention, whether crystalline or amorphous, also are contemplated as being part of this invention. The (+) isomers of the present compounds are preferred compounds of the present invention.

Unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds which differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms. For example, compounds having the present structures except for the replacement of a hydrogen by a deuterium or tritium, or the replacement of a carbon by a ¹³C- or ¹⁴C-enriched carbon are also within the scope of this invention.

It will be apparent to one skilled in the art that certain compounds of this invention may exist in alternative tautomeric forms. All such tautomeric forms of the present compounds are within the scope of the invention. Unless otherwise indicated, the representation of either tautomer is meant to include the other. For example, both isomers (1) and (2) are contemplated: wherein R′ is H or C_1-6 unsubstituted alkyl.

Prodrugs and solvates of the compounds of the invention are also contemplated herein. A discussion of prodrugs is provided in T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems (1987) 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series, and in Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, (1987) Edward B. Roche, ed., American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press. The term “prodrug” means a compound (e.g, a drug precursor) that is transformed in vivo to yield a compound of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate of the compound. The transformation may occur by various mechanisms (e.g., by metabolic or chemical processes), such as, for example, through hydrolysis in blood. A discussion of the use of prodrugs is provided by T. Higuchi and W. Stella, “Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems,” Vol. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series, and in Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, ed. Edward B. Roche, American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987.

For example, if a compound of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate of the compound contains a carboxylic acid functional group, a prodrug can comprise an ester formed by the replacement of the hydrogen atom of the acid group with a group such as, for example, (C₁-C₈)alkyl, (C₂-C₁₂)alkanoyloxymethyl, 1-(alkanoyloxy)ethyl having from 4 to 9 carbon atoms, 1-methyl-1-(alkanoyloxy)-ethyl having from 5 to 10 carbon atoms, alkoxycarbonyloxymethyl having from 3 to 6 carbon atoms, 1-(alkoxycarbonyloxy)ethyl having from 4 to 7 carbon atoms, 1-methyl-1-(alkoxycarbonyloxy)ethyl having from 5 to 8 carbon atoms, N-(alkoxycarbonyl)aminomethyl having from 3 to 9 carbon atoms, 1-(N-(alkoxycarbonyl)amino)ethyl having from 4 to 10 carbon atoms, 3-phthalidyl, 4-crotonolactonyl, gamma-butyrolacton-4-yl, di-N,N—(C₁-C₂)alkylamino(C₂-C₃)alkyl (such as β-dimethylaminoethyl), carbamoyl-(C₁-C₂)alkyl, N,N-di(C₁-C₂)alkylcarbamoyl-(C₁-C₂)alkyl and piperidino-, pyrrolidino- or morpholino(C₂-C₃)alkyl, and the like.

Similarly, if a compound of Formula (I) contains an alcohol functional group, a prodrug can be formed by the replacement of the hydrogen atom of the alcohol group with a group such as, for example, (C₁-C₆)alkanoyloxymethyl, 1-((C₁-C₆)alkanoyloxy)ethyl, 1-methyl-1-((C₁-C₆)alkanoyloxy)ethyl, (C₁-C₆)alkoxycarbonyloxymethyl, N—(C₁-C₆)alkoxycarbonylaminomethyl, succinoyl, (C₁-C₆)alkanoyl, α-amino(C₁-C₄)alkanyl, arylacyl and α-aminoacyl, or α-aminoacyl-α-aminoacyl, where each α-aminoacyl group is independently selected from the naturally occurring L-amino acids, P(O)(OH)₂, —P(O)(O(C₁-C₆)alkyl)₂ or glycosyl (the radical resulting from the removal of a hydroxyl group of the hemiacetal form of a carbohydrate), and the like.

If a compound of Formula (I) incorporates an amine functional group, a prodrug can be formed by the replacement of a hydrogen atom in the amine group with a group such as, for example, R-carbonyl, RO-carbonyl, NRR′-carbonyl where R and R′ are each independently (C₁-C₁₀)alkyl, (C₃-C₇) cycloalkyl, benzyl, or R-carbonyl is a natural α-aminoacyl or natural α-aminoacyl, —C(OH)C(O)OY¹ wherein Y¹ is H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl or benzyl, —C(OY²)Y³ wherein Y² is (C₁-C₄) alkyl and Y³ is (C₁-C₆)alkyl, carboxy(C₁-C₆)alkyl, amino(C₁-C₄)alkyl or mono-N- or di-N,N—(C₁-C₆)alkylaminoalkyl, —C(Y⁴)Y⁵ wherein Y⁴ is H or methyl and Y⁵ is mono-N— or di-N,N—(C₁-C₆)alkylamino morpholino, piperidin-1-yl or pyrrolidin-1-yl, and the like.

“Solvate” means a physical association of a compound of this invention with one or more solvent molecules. This physical association involves varying degrees of ionic and covalent bonding, including hydrogen bonding. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. “Solvate” encompasses both solution-phase and isolatable solvates. Non-limiting examples of suitable solvates include ethanolates, methanolates, and the like. “Hydrate” is a solvate wherein the solvent molecule is H₂O.

One or more compounds of the invention may also exist as, or optionally converted to, a solvate. Preparation of solvates is generally known. Thus, for example, M. Caira et al, J. Pharmaceutical Sci., 93(3), 601-611 (2004) describe the preparation of the solvates of the antifungal fluconazole in ethyl acetate as well as from water. Similar preparations of solvates, hemisolvate, hydrates and the like are described by E. C. van Tonder et al, AAPS PharmSciTech., 5(1), article 12 (2004); and A. L. Bingham et al, Chem. Commun., 603-604 (2001). A typical, non-limiting, process involves dissolving a compound in desired amounts of the desired solvent (organic or water or a mixture of two or more thereof) at a higher than ambient temperature, and cooling the solution at a rate sufficient to form crystals which are then isolated by standard methods. Analytical techniques such as, for example I.R. spectroscopy, show the presence of the solvent (or water) in the crystals as a solvate (or hydrate).

“Effective amount” or “therapeutically effective amount” is meant to describe an amount of a compound or a composition of the present invention effective in inhibiting HCV protease and/or cathepsins, and thus producing the desired therapeutic, ameliorative, inhibitory or preventative effect in a suitable subject.

The compounds of the present invention can form salts that are also within the scope of this invention. Reference to a compound of the present invention herein is understood to include reference to salts, esters and solvates thereof, unless otherwise indicated. The term “salt(s)”, as employed herein, denotes acidic salts formed with inorganic and/or organic acids, as well as basic salts formed with inorganic and/or organic bases. In addition, when a compound of formula I contains both a basic moiety, such as, but not limited to a pyridine or imidazole, and an acidic moiety, such as, but not limited to a carboxylic acid, zwitterions (“inner salts”) may be formed and are included within the term “salt(s)” as used herein. Pharmaceutically acceptable (i.e., non-toxic, physiologically acceptable) salts are preferred, although other salts are also useful. Salts of the compounds of the various formulae of the present invention may be formed, for example, by reacting a compound of the present invention with an amount of acid or base, such as an equivalent amount, in a medium such as one in which the salt precipitates or in an aqueous medium followed by lyophilization. Acids (and bases) which are generally considered suitable for the formation of pharmaceutically useful salts from basic (or acidic) pharmaceutical compounds are discussed, for example, by S. Berge et al, Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences (1977) 66(1) 1-19; P. Gould, International J. of Pharmaceutics (1986) 33 201-217; Anderson et al, The Practice of Medicinal Chemistry (1996), Academic Press, New York; in The Orange Book (Food & Drug Administration, Washington, D.C. on their website); and P. Heinrich Stahl, Camille G. Wermuth (Eds.), Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection, and Use, (2002) Int'l. Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry, pp. 330-331. These disclosures are incorporated herein by reference thereto.

Exemplary acid addition salts include acetates, adipates, alginates, ascorbates, aspartates, benzoates, benzenesulfonates, bisulfates, borates, butyrates, citrates, camphorates, camphorsulfonates, cyclopentanepropionates, digluconates, dodecylsulfates, ethanesulfonates, fumarates, glucoheptanoates, glycerophosphates, hemisulfates, heptanoates, hexanoates, hydrochlorides, hydrobromides, hydroiodides, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonates, lactates, maleates, methanesulfonates, methyl sulfates, 2-naphthalenesulfonates, nicotinates, nitrates, oxalates, pamoates, pectinates, persulfates, 3-phenylpropionates, phosphates, picrates, pivalates, propionates, salicylates, succinates, sulfates, sulfonates (such as those mentioned herein), tartarates, thiocyanates, toluenesulfonates (also known as tosylates,) undecanoates, and the like.

Exemplary basic salts include ammonium salts, alkali metal salts such as sodium, lithium, and potassium salts, alkaline earth metal salts such as calcium and magnesium salts, aluminum salts, zinc salts, salts with organic bases (for example, organic amines) such as benzathines, diethylamine, dicyclohexylamines, hydrabamines (formed with N,N-bis(dehydroabietyl)ethylenediamine), N-methyl-D-glucamines, N-methyl-D-glucamides, t-butyl amines, piperazine, phenylcyclohexylamine, choline, tromethamine, and salts with amino acids such as arginine, lysine and the like. Basic nitrogen-containing groups may be quarternized with agents such as lower alkyl halides (e.g. methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), dialkyl sulfates (e.g. dimethyl, diethyl, dibutyl, and diamyl sulfates), long chain halides (e.g. decyl, lauryl, myristyl and stearyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), aralkyl halides (e.g. benzyl and phenethyl bromides), and others.

All such acid salts and base salts are intended to be pharmaceutically acceptable salts within the scope of the invention. All acid and base salts, as well as esters and solvates, are considered equivalent to the free forms of the corresponding compounds for purposes of the invention.

Pharmaceutically acceptable esters of the present compounds include the following groups: (1) carboxylic acid esters obtained by esterification of the hydroxy groups, in which the non-carbonyl moiety of the carboxylic acid portion of the ester grouping is selected from straight or branched chain alkyl (for example, acetyl, n-propyl, t-butyl, or n-butyl), alkoxyalkyl (for example, methoxymethyl), aralkyl (for example, benzyl), aryloxyalkyl (for example, phenoxymethyl), aryl (for example, phenyl optionally substituted with, for example, halogen, C_1-4alkyl, or C_1-4alkoxy or amino); (2) sulfonate esters, such as alkyl- or aralkylsulfonyl (for example, methanesulfonyl); (3) amino acid esters (for example, L-valyl or L-isoleucyl); (4) phosphonate esters and (5) mono-, di- or triphosphate esters. The phosphate esters may be further esterified by, for example, a C_1-20 alcohol or reactive derivative thereof, or by a 2,3-di(C_6-24)acyl glycerol.

In such esters, unless otherwise specified, any alkyl moiety present preferably contains from 1 to 18 carbon atoms, particularly from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more particularly from 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Any cycloalkyl moiety present in such esters preferably contains from 3 to 6 carbon atoms. Any aryl moiety present in such esters preferably comprises a phenyl group.

The present invention provides controlled-release pharmaceutical formulations comprising the inventive peptides as an active ingredient and a controlled-release carrier. Because of their HCV inhibitory activity, such pharmaceutical compositions possess utility in treating hepatitis C and related disorders.

Another embodiment of the invention discloses the use of the pharmaceutical formulations disclosed above for treatment of diseases such as, for example, hepatitis C and the like. The method comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of the inventive pharmaceutical formulation to a patient having such a disease or diseases and in need of such a treatment.

The pharmaceutical formulations of the present invention are suited for treatment of infection by any of the genotypes of HCV. HCV types and subtypes may differ in their antigenicity, level of viremia, severity of disease produced, and response to interferon therapy. (Holland, J. et al., “Hepatitis C genotyping by direct sequencing of the product from the Roche Amplicor Test: methodology and application to a South Australian population,” Pathology, 30:192-195, 1998). The nomenclature of Simmonds, P. et al. (“Classification of hepatitis C virus into six major genotypes and a series of subtypes by phylogenetic analysis of the NS-5 region,” J. Gen. Virol., 74:2391-9, 1993) is widely used and classifies isolates into six major genotypes, 1 through 6, with two or more related subtypes, e.g., 1a, 1b. Additional genotypes 7-10 and 11 have been proposed, however the phylogenetic basis on which this classification is based has been questioned, and thus types 7, 8, 9 and 11 isolates have been reassigned as type 6, and type 10 isolates as type 3. (Lamballerie, X. et al., “Classification of hepatitis C variants in six major types based on analysis of the envelope 1 and nonstructural 5B genome regions and complete polyprotein sequences,” J. Gen. Virol., 78:45-51, 1997). The major genotypes have been defined as having sequence similarities of between 55 and 72% (mean 64.5%), and subtypes within types as having 75%-86% similarity (mean 80%) when sequenced in the NS-5 region. (Simmonds, P. et al., “Identification of genotypes of hepatitis C by sequence comparisons in the core, E1 and NS-5 regions,” J. Gen. Virol., 75:1053-61, 1994).

In an alternative embodiment, the controlled-release formulations of the present invention can be useful for inhibiting cathepsin activity, for example for treating cancer and other cathepsin-associated disorders as discussed below.

In yet another embodiment, the compounds of the invention may be used for the treatment of HCV in humans in monotherapy mode or in a combination therapy (e.g., dual combination, triple combination etc.) mode such as, for example, in combination with antiviral and/or immunomodulatory agents. Examples of such antiviral and/or immunomodulatory agents include Ribavirin (from Schering-Plough Corporation, Madison, N.J.) and Levovirin™ (from ICN Pharmaceuticals, Costa Mesa, Calif.), VP 50406™ (from Viropharma, Incorporated, Exton, Pa.), ISIS 14803™ (from ISIS Pharmaceuticals, Carlsbad, Calif.), Heptazyme™ (from Ribozyme Pharmaceuticals, Boulder, Colo.), VX 497™ (from Vertex Pharmaceuticals, Cambridge, Mass.), Thymosin™ (from SciClone Pharmaceuticals, San Mateo, Calif.), Maxamine™ (Maxim Pharmaceuticals, San Diego, Calif.), mycophenolate mofetil (from Hoffman-LaRoche, Nutley, N.J.), interferon (such as, for example, interferon-alpha, PEG-interferon alpha conjugates) and the like. “PEG-interferon alpha conjugates” are interferon alpha molecules covalently attached to a PEG molecule. Illustrative PEG-interferon alpha conjugates include interferon alpha-2a (Roferon™, from Hoffman La-Roche, Nutley, N.J.) in the form of pegylated interferon alpha-2a (e.g., as sold under the trade name Pegasys™), interferon alpha-2b (Intron™, from Schering-Plough Corporation) in the form of pegylated interferon alpha-2b (e.g., as sold under the trade name PEG-Intron™), interferon alpha-2c (Berofor Alpha™, from Boehringer Ingelheim, Ingelheim, Germany) or consensus interferon as defined by determination of a consensus sequence of naturally occurring interferon alphas (Infergen™, from Amgen, Thousand Oaks, Calif.).

The HCV protease inhibitor can be administered in combination with interferon alpha, PEG-interferon alpha conjugates or consensus interferon concurrently or consecutively at recommended dosages for the duration of HCV treatment in accordance with the methods of the present invention. The commercially available forms of interferon alpha include interferon alpha 2a and interferon alpha 2b and also pegylated forms of both aforementioned interferon alphas. The recommended dosage of INTRON-A interferon alpha 2b (commercially available from Schering-Plough Corp.) as administered by subcutaneous injection at 3MIU(12 mcg)/0.5 mL/TIW is for 24 weeks or 48 weeks for first time treatment. The recommended dosage of PEG-INTRON interferon alpha 2b pegylated (commercially available from Schering-Plough Corp.) as administered by subcutaneous injection at 1.5 mcg/kg/week, within a range of 40 to 150 mcg/week, is for at least 24 weeks. The recommended dosage of ROFERON A inteferon alpha 2a (commercially available from Hoffmann-La Roche) as administered by subcutaneous or intramuscular injection at 3MIU(11.1 mcg/mL)/TIW is for at least 48 to 52 weeks, or alternatively 6MIU/TIW for 12 weeks followed by 3MIU/TIW for 36 weeks. The recommended dosage of PEGASUS interferon alpha 2a pegylated (commercially available from Hoffmann-La Roche) as administered by subcutaneous injection at 180 mcg/1 mL or 180 mcg/0.5 mL is once a week for at least 24 weeks. The recommended dosage of INFERGEN interferon alphacon-1 (commercially available from Amgen) as administered by subcutaneous injection at 9 mcg/TIW is for 24 weeks for first time treatment and up to 15 mcg/TIW for 24 weeks for non-responsive or relapse treatment. Optionally, Ribavirin, a synthetic nucleoside analogue with activity against a broad spectrum of viruses including HCV, can be included in combination with the interferon and the HCV protease inhibitor. The recommended dosage of ribavirin is in a range from 600 to 1400 mg per day for at least 24 weeks (commercially available as REBETOL ribavirin from Schering-Plough or COPEGUS ribavirin from Hoffmann-La Roche). Alternatively, ribavirin may be administered in combination with interferon and at least one HCV protease inhibitor for at least 12 weeks (e.g., for 12-48 weeks or 24-48 weeks).

In yet another embodiment, ribavirin and interferon may be administered for 4 weeks prior to the combined treatment of ribavirin, interferon and at least one HCV protease inhibitor. Alternatively, ribavirin and interferon may be administered for 4 weeks concurrently with at least one HCV protease inhibitor prior to increasing the dose of at least one HCV protease inhibitor.

In one embodiment of the present invention, the dosage regimens are as follows:

• • interferon and ribavirin administered concurrently with about 1920 mg to about 3000 mg per day (e.g., 800 mg TID or 600 mg QID) of at least one HCV protease inhibitor for 12-48 weeks.
  • interferon and ribavirin administered for 4 weeks followed by about 1920 mg to about 3000 mg per day (e.g., 800 mg TID or 600 mg QID) of at least one HCV protease inhibitor in combination with interferon and ribavirin for 12-48 weeks.
  • interferon and ribavirin administered for 4 weeks followed by about 1920 mg to about 3000 mg per day (e.g., 800 mg TID or 600 mg QID) of at least one HCV protease inhibitor in combination with interferon and ribavirin for 24-48 weeks.
  • interferon and ribavirin administered concurrently with about 1920 mg to about 4000 mg per day of at least one HCV protease inhibitor (e.g., about 600 mg QID to about 800 mg QID, preferably 600 mg QID or 800 mg QID) for 4 weeks followed by about 1920 mg to about 3000 mg per day (e.g., 800 mg TID or 600 mg QID) of at least one HCV protease inhibitor in combination with interferon and ribavirin for 12-48 weeks. Preferably, at least one HCV protease inhibitor of the aforementioned dosage regimes is the compound of Formula I, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof, or a mixture of two or more thereof.

In another embodiment of the present invention, the dosage regimens are as follows:

• • interferon and ribavirin administered concurrently with about 1800 mg to about 2813 mg per day (e.g., 750 mg TID) of at least one HCV protease inhibitor for 12 weeks.
  • interferon and ribavirin administered concurrently with about 1800 mg to about 2813 mg per day (e.g., 750 mg TID) of at least one HCV protease inhibitor for 12 weeks, followed by administration of interferon and ribavirin for an additional 12 weeks.
  • interferon and ribavirin administered concurrently with about 1800 mg to about 2813 mg per day (e.g., 750 mg TID) of at least one HCV protease inhibitor for 12 weeks, followed by administration of interferon and ribavirin for an additional 36 weeks. In one preferred embodiment, at least one HCV protease inhibitor of the aforementioned dosage regimes is the compound of Formula XXVII, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof, or a mixture of two or more thereof. In another preferred embodiment, at least one HCV protease inhibitor of the aforementioned dosage regimes is the compound of Formula XXVIII, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof, or a mixture of two or more thereof.

The dosage regimens recited herein apply to treatment populations that include treatment naive, nonresponders and relapse patients.

In one embodiment, the compounds of the invention can be used to treat cellular proliferation diseases. Such cellular proliferation disease states which can be treated by the compounds, compositions and methods provided herein include, but are not limited to, cancer (further discussed below), hyperplasia, cardiac hypertrophy, autoimmune diseases, fungal disorders, arthritis, graft rejection, inflammatory bowel disease, immune disorders, inflammation, cellular proliferation induced after medical procedures, including, but not limited to, surgery, angioplasty, and the like. Treatment includes inhibiting cellular proliferation. It is appreciated that in some cases the cells may not be in a hyper- or hypoproliferation state (abnormal state) and still require treatment. For example, during wound healing, the cells may be proliferating “normally”, but proliferation enhancement may be desired. Thus, in one embodiment, the invention herein includes application to cells or subjects afflicted or subject to impending affliction with any one of these disorders or states.

The methods provided herein are particularly useful for the treatment of cancer including solid tumors such as skin, breast, brain, colon, gall bladder, thyroid, cervical carcinomas, testicular carcinomas, etc. More particularly, cancers that may be treated by the compounds, compositions and methods of the invention include, but are not limited to:

Cardiac: sarcoma (angiosarcoma, fibrosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, liposarcoma), myxoma, rhabdomyoma, fibroma, lipoma and teratoma;

Lung: bronchogenic carcinoma (squamous cell, undifferentiated small cell, undifferentiated large cell, adenocarcinoma), alveolar (bronchiolar) carcinoma, bronchial adenoma, sarcoma, lymphoma, chondromatous hamartoma, mesothelioma;

Gastrointestinal: esophagus (squamous cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, leiomyosarcoma, lymphoma), stomach (carcinoma, lymphoma, leiomyosarcoma), pancreas (ductal adenocarcinoma, insulinoma, glucagonoma, gastrinoma, carcinoid tumors, vipoma), small bowel (adenocarcinoma, lymphoma, carcinoid tumors, Karposi's sarcoma, leiomyoma, hemangioma, lipoma, neurofibroma, fibroma), large bowel (adenocarcinoma, tubular adenoma, villous adenoma, hamartoma, leiomyoma);

Genitourinary tract: kidney (adenocarcinoma, Wilm's tumor (nephroblastoma), lymphoma, leukemia), bladder and urethra (squamous cell carcinoma, transitional cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma), prostate (adenocarcinoma, sarcoma), testis (seminoma, teratoma, embryonal carcinoma, teratocarcinoma, choriocarcinoma, sarcoma, interstitial cell carcinoma, fibroma, fibroadenoma, adenomatoid tumors, lipoma);

Liver: hepatoma (hepatocellular carcinoma), cholangiocarcinoma, hepatoblastoma, angiosarcoma, hepatocellular adenoma, hemangioma;

Bone: osteogenic sarcoma (osteosarcoma), fibrosarcoma, malignant fibrous histiocytoma, chondrosarcoma, Ewing's sarcoma, malignant lymphoma (reticulum cell sarcoma), multiple myeloma, malignant giant cell tumor chordoma, osteochronfroma (osteocartilaginous exostoses), benign chondroma, chondroblastoma, chondromyxofibroma, osteoid osteoma and giant cell tumors;

Nervous system: skull (osteoma, hemangioma, granuloma, xanthoma, osteitis deformans), meninges (meningioma, meningiosarcoma, gliomatosis), brain (astrocytoma, medulloblastoma, glioma, ependymoma, germinoma (pinealoma), glioblastoma multiform, oligodendroglioma, schwannoma, retinoblastoma, congenital tumors), spinal cord neurofibroma, meningioma, glioma, sarcoma);

Gynecological: uterus (endometrial carcinoma), cervix (cervical carcinoma, pre-tumor cervical dysplasia), ovaries (ovarian carcinoma (serous cystadenocarcinoma, mucinous cystadenocarcinoma, unclassified carcinoma), granulosa-thecal cell tumors, Sertoli-Leydig cell tumors, dysgerminoma, malignant teratoma), vulva (squamous cell carcinoma, intraepithelial carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, fibrosarcoma, melanoma), vagina (clear cell carcinoma, squamous cell carcinoma, botryoid sarcoma (embryonal rhabdomyosarcoma), fallopian tubes (carcinoma);

Hematologic: blood (myeloid leukemia (acute and chronic), acute lymphoblastic leukemia, acute and chronic lymphocytic leukemia, myeloproliferative diseases, multiple myeloma, myelodysplastic syndrome), Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (malignant lymphoma), B-cell lymphoma, T-cell lymphoma, hairy cell lymphoma, Burkett's lymphoma, promyelocytic leukemia;

Skin: malignant melanoma, basal cell carcinoma, squamous cell carcinoma, Karposi's sarcoma, moles dysplastic nevi, lipoma, angioma, dermatofibroma, keloids, psoriasis;

Adrenal glands: neuroblastoma; and

Other tumors: including xenoderoma pigmentosum, keratoctanthoma and thyroid follicular cancer.

As used herein, treatment of cancer includes treatment of cancerous cells, including cells afflicted by any one of the above-identified conditions.

The compounds of the present invention may also be useful in the chemoprevention of cancer. Chemoprevention is defined as inhibiting the development of invasive cancer by either blocking the initiating mutagenic event or by blocking the progression of pre-malignant cells that have already suffered an insult or inhibiting tumor relapse.

The compounds of the present invention may also be useful in inhibiting tumor angiogenesis and metastasis.

The compounds of the present invention may also be useful as antifungal agents, by modulating the activity of the fungal members of the bimC kinesin subgroup, as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,284,480.

The present compounds are also useful in combination with one or more other known therapeutic agents and anti-cancer agents. Combinations of the present compounds with other anti-cancer or chemotherapeutic agents are within the scope of the invention. Examples of such agents can be found in Cancer Principles and Practice of Oncology by V. T. Devita and S. Hellman (editors), 6^th edition (Feb. 15, 2001), Lippincott Williams & Wilkins Publishers. A person of ordinary skill in the art would be able to discern which combinations of agents would be useful based on the particular characteristics of the drugs and the cancer involved. Such anti-cancer agents include, but are not limited to, the following: estrogen receptor modulators, androgen receptor modulators, retinoid receptor modulators, cytotoxic/cytostatic agents, antiproliferative agents, prenyl-protein transferase inhibitors, HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors and other angiogenesis inhibitors, inhibitors of cell proliferation and survival signaling, apoptosis inducing agents and agents that interfere with cell cycle checkpoints. The present compounds are also useful when co-administered with radiation therapy.

The phrase “estrogen receptor modulators” refers to compounds that interfere with or inhibit the binding of estrogen to the receptor, regardless of mechanism. Examples of estrogen receptor modulators include, but are not limited to, tamoxifen, raloxifene, idoxifene, LY353381, LY117081, toremifene, fulvestrant, 4-[7-(2,2-dimethyl-1-oxopropoxy-4-methyl-2-[4-[2-(1-piperidinyl)ethoxy]phenyl]-2H-1-benzopyran-3-yl]-phenyl-2,2-dimethylpropanoate, 4,4′-dihydroxybenzophenone-2,4-dinitrophenyl-ydrazone, aid SH646.

The phrase “androgen receptor modulators” refers to compounds which interfere or inhibit the binding of androgens to the receptor, regardless of mechanism. Examples of androgen receptor modulators include finasteride and other 5α-reductase inhibitors, nilutamide, flutamide, bicalutamide, liarozole, and abiraterone acetate.

The phrase “retinoid receptor modulators” refers to compounds which interfere or inhibit the binding of retinoids to the receptor, regardless of mechanism. Examples of such retinoid receptor modulators include bexarotene, tretinoin, 13-cis-retinoic acid, 9-cis-retinoic acid, a difluoromethylornithine, ILX23-7553, trans-N-(4′-hydroxyphenyl)retinamide, and N-4-carboxyphenyl retinamide.

The phrase “cytotoxic/cytostatic agents” refer to compounds which cause cell death or inhibit cell proliferation primarily by interfering directly with the cell's functioning or inhibit or interfere with cell mycosis, including alkylating agents, tumor necrosis factors, intercalators, hypoxia activatable compounds, microtubule inhibitors/microtubule-stabilizing agents, inhibitors of mitotic kinesins, inhibitors of kinases involved in mitotic progression, antimetabolites; biological response modifiers; hormonal/anti-hormonal therapeutic agents, haematopoietic growth factors, monoclonal antibody targeted therapeutic agents, monoclonal antibody therapeutics, topoisomerase inhibitors, proteasome inhibitors and ubiquitin ligase inhibitors.

Examples of cytotoxic agents include, but are not limited to, sertenef, cachectin, ifosfamide, tasonermin, lonidamine, carboplatin, altretamine, prednimustine, dibromodulcitol, ranimustine, fotemustine, nedaplatin, oxaliplatin, temozolomide (TEMODAR™ from Schering-Plough Corporation, Kenilworth, N.J.), cyclophosphamide, heptaplatin, estramustine, improsulfan tosilate, trofosfamide, nimustine, dibrospidium chloride, pumitepa, lobaplatin, satraplatin, profiromycin, cisplatin, doxorubicin, irofulven, dexifosfamide, cis-aminedichloro(2-methyl-pyridine)platinum, benzylguanine, glufosfamide, GPX100, (trans, trans, trans)-bis-mu-(hexane-1,6-diamine)-mu-[diamine-platinum(II)]bis[diamine(chloro)platinum(II)]tetrachloride, diarizidinylspermine, arsenic trioxide, 1-(11-dodecylamino-10-hydroxyundecyl)-3,7-dimethylxanthine, zorubicin, idarubicin, daunorubicin, bisantrene, mitoxantrone, pirarubicin, pinafide, valrubicin, amrubicin, antineoplaston, 3′-deansino-3′-morpholino-13-deoxo-10-hydroxycaminomycin, annamycin, galarubicin, elinafide, MEN10755, 4-demethoxy-3-deamino-3-aziridinyl-4-methylsulphonyl-daunombicin (see WO 00/50032), methoxtrexate, gemcitabine, and mixture thereof.

An example of a hypoxia activatable compound is tirapazamine.

Examples of proteasome inhibitors include, but are not limited to, lactacystin and bortezomib.

Examples of microtubule inhibitors/microtubule-stabilising agents include paclitaxel, vindesine sulfate, 3′,4′-didehydro-4′-deoxy-8′-norvincaleukoblastine, docetaxel, rhizoxin, dolastatin, mivobulin isethionate, auristatin, cemadotin, RPR109881, BMS184476, vinflunine, cryptophycin, 2,3,4,5,6-pentafluoro-N-(3-fluoro-4-methoxyphenyl)benzene sulfonamide, anhydrovinblastine, N,N-dimethyl-L-valyl-L-valyl-N-methyl-L-valyl-L-prolyl-L-proline-t-butylamide, TDX258, the epothilones (see for example U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,284,781 and 6,288,237) and BMS188797.

Some examples of topoisomerase inhibitors are topotecan, hycaptamine, irinotecan, rubitecan, 6-ethoxypropionyl-3′,4′-O-exo-benzylidene-chartreusin, 9-methoxy-N,N-dimethyl-5-nitropyrazolo[3,4,5-kl]acridine-2-(6H) propanamine, 1-amino-9-ethyl-5-fluoro-2,3-dihydro-9-hydroxy-4-methyl-1H,12H-benzo[de]pyrano[3′,4′:b,7]-indolizino[1,2b]quinoline-10,13(9H,15H)dione, lurtotecan, 7-[2-(N-isopropylamino)ethyl]-(20S)camptothecin, BNP1350, BNPI1100, BN80915, BN80942, etoposide phosphate, teniposide, sobuzoxane, 2′-dimethylamino-2′-deoxy-etoposide, GL331, N-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-9-hydroxy-5,6-dimethyl-6H-pyrido[4,3-b]carbazole-1-carboxamide, asulacrine, (5a,5aB,8aa,9b)-9-[2-[N-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-N-methylamino]ethyl]-5-[4-hydroxy-3,5-dimethoxyphenyl]-5,5a,6,8,8a,9-hexohydrofuro(3′,4′:6,7)naphtho(2,3-d)-1,3-dioxol-6-one, 2,3-(methylenedioxy)-5-methyl-7-hydroxy-8-methoxybenzo[c]-phenanthridinium, 6,9-bis[(2-aminoethyl)amino]benzo[g]isoquinoline-5,10-dione, 5-(3-aminopropylamino)-7, 10-dihydroxy-2-(2-hydroxyethylaminomethyl)-6H-pyrazolo[4,5,1-de]acridin-6-one, N-[1-[2-(diethylamino)ethylamino]-7-methoxy-9-oxo-9H-thioxanthen-4-ylmethyl]formamide, N-(2-(dimethylamino)ethyl)acridine-4-carboxamide, 6-[[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]amino]-3-hydroxy-7H-indeno[2,1-c]quinolin-7-one, dimesna, and camptostar.

Other useful anti-cancer agents that can be used in combination with the present compounds include thymidilate synthase inhibitors, such as 5-fluorouracil.

In one embodiment, inhibitors of mitotic kinesins include, but are not limited to, inhibitors of KSP, inhibitors of MKLP1, inhibitors of CENP-E, inhibitors of MCAK, inhibitors of Kif14, inhibitors of Mphosph1 and inhibitors of Rab6-KIFL.

The phrase “inhibitors of kinases involved in mitotic progression” include, but are not limited to, inhibitors of aurora kinase, inhibitors of Polo-like kinases (PLK) (in particular inhibitors of PLK-1), inhibitors of bub-1 and inhibitors of bub-R1.

The phrase “antiproliferative agents” includes antisense RNA and DNA oligonucleotides such as G3139, ODN698, RVASKRAS, GEM231, and INX3001, and antimetabolites such as enocitabine, carmofur, tegafur, pentostatin, doxifluridine, trimetrexate, fludarabine, capecitabine, galocitabine, cytarabine ocfosfate, fosteabine sodium hydrate, raltitrexed, paltitrexid, emitefur, tiazofurin, decitabine, nolatrexed, pemetrexed, nelzarabine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidenecytidine, 2′-fluoromethylene-2′-deoxycytidine, N-[5-(2,3-dihydro-benzofuryl)sulfonyl]-N′-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)urea, N6-[4-deoxy-4-[N2-[2(E),4(E)-tetradecadienoyl]glycylamino]-L-glycero-B-L-manno-heptopyranosyl]adenine, aplidine, ecteinascidin, troxacitabine, 4-[2-amino-4-oxo-4,6,7,8-tetrahydro-3H-pyrimidino[5,4-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl-(S)-ethyl]-2,5-thienoyl-L-glutamic acid, aminopterin, 5-fluorouracil, alanosine, 11-acetyl-8-(carbamoyloxymethyl)-4-formyl-6-methoxy-14-oxa-1,11-diazatetracyclo(7.4.1.0.0)-tetradeca-2,4,6-trien-9-yl acetic acid ester, swainsonine, lometrexol, dexrazoxane, methioninase, 2′-cyano-2′-deoxy-N4-palmitoyl-1-B-D-arabino furanosyl cytosine and 3-aminopyridine-2-carboxaldehyde thiosemicarbazone.

Examples of monoclonal antibody targeted therapeutic agents include those therapeutic agents which have cytotoxic agents or radioisotopes attached to a cancer cell specific or target cell specific monoclonal antibody. Examples include Bexxar.

Examples of monoclonal antibody therapeutics useful for treating cancer include Erbitux (Cetuximab).

The phrase “HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors” refers to inhibitors of 3-hydroxy-3-methylglutaryl-CoA reductase. Examples of HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors that may be used include but are not limited to lovastatin, simvastatin (ZOCOR®), pravastatin (PRAVACHOL®), fluvastatin and atorvastatin (LIPITOR®; see U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,273,995, 4,681,893, 5,489,691 and 5,342,952). The structural formulas of these and additional HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors that may be used in the instant methods are described at page 87 of M. Yalpani, “Cholesterol Lowering Drugs”, Chemistry & Industry, pp. 85-89 (5 Feb. 1996) and U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,782,084 and 4,885,314. The term HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor as used herein includes all pharmaceutically acceptable lactone and open-acid forms (i.e., where the lactone ring is opened to form the free acid) as well as salt and ester forms of compounds which have HMG-CoA reductase inhibitory activity, and therefore the use of such salts, esters, open acid and lactone forms is included in the scope of this invention.

The phrase “prenyl-protein transferase inhibitor” refers to a compound which inhibits any one or any combination of the prenyl-protein transferase enzymes, including farnesyl-protein transferase (FPTase), geranylgeranyl-protein transferase type I (GGPTase-I), and geranylgeranyl-protein transferase type-II (GGPTase-II, also called Rab GGPTase).

Examples of prenyl-protein transferase inhibitors can be found in the following publications and patents: WO 96/30343, WO 97/18813, WO 97/21701, WO 97/23478, WO 97/38665, WO 98/28980, WO 98/29119, WO 95/32987, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,420,245, 5,523,430, 5,532,359, 5,510,510, 5,589,485, 5,602,098, European Patent Publ. 0 618 221, European Patent Publ. 0 675 112, European Patent Publ. 0 604181, European Patent Publ. 0 696 593, WO 94/19357, WO 95/08542, WO 95/11917, WO 95/12612, WO 95/12572, WO 95/10514, U.S. Pat. No. 5,661,152, WO 95/10515, WO 95/10516, WO 95/24612, WO 95/34535, WO 95/25086, WO 96/05529, WO 96/06138, WO 96/06193, WO 96/16443, WO 96/21701, WO 96/21456, WO 96/22278, WO 96/24611, WO 96/24612, WO 96/05168, WO 96/05169, WO 96/00736, U.S. Pat. No. 5,571,792, WO 96/17861, WO 96/33159, WO 96/34850, WO 96/34851, WO 96/30017, WO 96/30018, WO 96/30362, WO 96/30363, WO 96/31111, WO 96/31477, WO 96/31478, WO 96/31501, WO 97/00252, WO 97/03047, WO 97/03050, WO 97/04785, WO 97/02920, WO 97/17070, WO 97/23478, WO 97/26246, WO, 97/30053, WO 97/44350, WO 98/02436, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,532,359. For an example of the role of a prenyl-protein transferase inhibitor on angiogenesis see European of Cancer, Vol. 35, No. 9, pp. 1394-1401 (1999).

Examples of farnesyl protein transferase inhibitors include SARASAR™ (4-[2-[4-[(11R)-3,10-dibromo-8-chloro-6,11-dihydro-5H-benzo[5,6]cyclohepta[1,2-b]pyridin-11-yl-]-1-piperidinyl]-2-oxoethyl]-1-piperidinecarboxamide from Schering-Plough Corporation, Kenilworth, N.J.), tipifarnib (Zarnestra® or R115777 from Janssen Pharmaceuticals), L778,123 (a farnesyl protein transferase inhibitor from Merck & Company, Whitehouse Station, N.J.), BMS 214662 (a farnesyl protein transferase inhibitor from Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharmaceuticals, Princeton, N.J.).

The phrase “angiogenesis inhibitors” refers to compounds that inhibit the formation of new blood vessels, regardless of mechanism. Examples of angiogenesis inhibitors include, but are not limited to, tyrosine kinase inhibitors, such as inhibitors of the tyrosine kinase receptors Flt-1 (VEGFR1) and Flk-1/KDR (VEGFR2), inhibitors of epidermal-derived, fibroblast-derived, or platelet derived growth factors, MMP (matrix metalloprotease) inhibitors, integrin blockers, interferon-α (for example Intron and Peg-Intron), interleukin-12, pentosan polysulfate, cyclooxygenase inhibitors, including nonsteroidal anti-inflammatories (NSAIDs) like aspirin and ibuprofen as well as selective cyclooxygenase-2 inhibitors like celecoxib and rofecoxib (PNAS, Vol. 89, p. 7384 (1992); JNCI, Vol. 69, p. 475 (1982); Arch. Opthalmol., Vol. 108, p. 573 (1990); Anat. Rec., Vol. 238, p. 68 (1994); FEBS Letters, Vol. 372, p. 83 (1995); Clin. Orthop. Vol. 313, p. 76 (1995); J. Mol. Endocrinol., Vol. 16, p. 107 (1996); Jpn. J. Pharmacol., Vol. 75, p. 105 (1997); Cancer Res., Vol. 57, p. 1625 (1997); Cell, Vol. 93, p. 705 (1998); Intl. J. Mol. Med., Vol. 2, p. 715 (1998); J. Biol. Chem., Vol. 274, p. 9116 (1999)), steroidal anti-inflammatories (such as corticosteroids, mineralocorticoids, dexamethasone, prednisone, prednisolone, methylpred, betamethasone), carboxyamidotriazole, combretastatin A-4, squalamine, 6-O-chloroacetyl-carbonyl)-fumagillol, thalidomide, angiostatin, troponin-1, angiotensin II antagonists (see Fernandez et al., J. Lab. Clin. Med. 105:141-145 (1985)), and antibodies to VEGF (see, Nature Biotechnology, Vol. 17, pp. 963-968 (October 1999); Kim et al., Nature, 362, 841-844 (1993); WO 00/44777; and WO 00/61186).

Other therapeutic agents that modulate or inhibit angiogenesis and may also be used in combination with the compounds of the instant invention include agents that modulate or inhibit the coagulation and fibrinolysis systems (see review in Clin. Chem. La. Med. 38:679-692 (2000)). Examples of such agents that modulate or inhibit the coagulation and fibrinolysis pathways include, but are not limited to, heparin (see Thromb. Haemost. 80:10-23 (1998)), low molecular weight heparins and carboxypeptidase U inhibitors (also known as inhibitors of active thrombin activatable fibrinolysis inhibitor [TAFIa]) (see Thrombosis Res. 101:329-354 (2001)). Examples of TAFIa inhibitors have been described in PCT Publication WO 03/013,526.

The phrase “agents that interfere with cell cycle checkpoints” refers to compounds that inhibit protein kinases that transduce cell cycle checkpoint signals, thereby sensitizing the cancer cell to DNA damaging agents. Such agents include inhibitors of ATR, ATM, the Chk1 and Chk2 kinases and cdk and cdc kinase inhibitors and are specifically exemplified by 7-hydroxystaurosporin, flavopiridol, CYC202 (Cyclacel) and BMS-387032.

The phrase “inhibitors of cell proliferation and survival signaling pathway” refers to agents that inhibit cell surface receptors and signal transduction cascades downstream of those surface receptors. Such agents include inhibitors of EGFR (for example gefitinib and erlotinib), antibodies to EGFR (for example C225), inhibitors of ERB-2 (for example trastuzumab), inhibitors of IGFR, inhibitors of cytokine receptors, inhibitors of MET, inhibitors of PI3K (for example LY294002), serine/threonine kinases (including but not limited to inhibitors of Akt such as described in WO 02/083064, WO 02/083139, WO 02/083140 and WO 02/083138), inhibitors of Raf kinase (for example BAY-43-9006), inhibitors of MEEK (for example CI-1040 and PD-098059), inhibitors of mTOR (for example Wyeth CCI-779), and inhibitors of C-abl kinase (for example GLEEVEC™, Novartis Pharmaceuticals). Such agents include small molecule inhibitor compounds and antibody antagonists.

The phrase “apoptosis inducing agents” includes activators of TNF receptor family members (including the TRAIL receptors).

The invention also encompasses combinations with NSAID's which are selective COX-2 inhibitors. For purposes of this specification NSAID's which are selective inhibitors of COX-2 are defined as those which possess a specificity for inhibiting COX-2 over COX-1 of at least 100 fold as measured by the ratio of IC50 for COX-2 over IC50 for COX-1 evaluated by cell or microsomal assays. Inhibitors of COX-2 that are particularly useful in the instant method of treatment are: 3-phenyl-4-(4-(methylsulfonyl)phenyl)-2-(5H)-furanone; and 5-chloro-3-(4-methylsulfonyl)phenyl-2-(2-methyl-5 pyridinyl)pyridine; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Compounds that have been described as specific inhibitors of COX-2 and are therefore useful in the present invention include, but are not limited to, parecoxib, CELIEBREX® and BEXTRA® or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Other examples of angiogenesis inhibitors include, but are not limited to, endostatin, ukrain, ranpirnase, IM862, 5-methoxy-4-[2-methyl-3-(3-methyl-2-butenyl)oxiranyl]-1-oxaspiro[2,5]oct-6-yl(chloroacetyl)carbamate, acetyldinanaline, 5-amino-1-[[3,5-dichloro-4-(4-chlorobenzoyl)phenyl]methyl]-1H-1,2,3-triazole-4-carboxamide, CM101, squalamine, combretastatin, RP14610, NX31838, sulfated mannopentaose phosphate, 7,7-(carbonyl-bis[imino-N-methyl-4,2-pyrrolocarbonylimino[N-methyl-4,2-pyrrole]-carbonylimino]-bis-(1,3-naphthalene disulfonate), and 3-[(2,4-dimethylpyrrol-5-yl)methylene]-2-indolinone (SU5416).

As used above, “integrin blockers” refers to compounds which selectively antagonize, inhibit or counteract binding of a physiological ligand to the α_vβ₃ integrin, to compounds which selectively antagonize, inhibit or counteract binding of a physiological ligand to the α_vβ₅ integrin, to compounds which antagonize, inhibit or counteract binding of a physiological ligand to both the α_vβ₃ integrin and the α_vβ₅ integrin, and to compounds which antagonize, inhibit or counteract the activity of the particular integrin(s) expressed on capillary endothelial cells. The term also refers to antagonists of the α_vβ₆, α_vβ₈, α₁β₁, α₅β₁, α₆β₁ and α₆β₄ integrins. The term also refers to antagonists of any combination of α_vβ₃, α_vβ₅, α_vβ₆, α_vβ₈, α₁β₁, α₂β₁, α₅β₁, α₆β₁ and α₆β₄ integrins.

Some examples of tyrosine kinase inhibitors include N-(trifluoromethylphenyl)-5-methylisoxazol-4-carboxamide, 3-[(2,4-dimethylpyrrol-5-yl)methylidenyl)indolin-2-one, 17-(allylamino)-17-demethoxygeldanamycin, 4-(3-chloro-4-fluorophenylamino)-7-methoxy-6-[3-(4-morpholinyl)propoxyl]quinazoline, N-(3-ethynyl phenyl)-6,7-bis(2-methoxyethoxy)-4-quinazolinamine, BIBX1382, 2,3,9,10,11,12-hexahydro-10-(hydroxymethyl)-10-hydroxy-9-methyl-9,12-epoxy-1H-diindolo[1,2,3-fg:3′,2′,1′-kl]pyrrolo[3,4-i][1,6]benzodiazocin-1-one, SH268, genistein, ST1571, CEP2563, 4-(3-chlorophenylamino)-5,6-dimethyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidinemethane sulfonate, 4-(3-bromo-4-hydroxyphenyl)amino-6,7-dimethoxyquinazoline, 4-(4′-hydroxyphenyl)amino-6,7-dimethoxyquinazoline, SU6668, STI571A, N-4-chlorophenyl-4-(4-pyridylmethyl)-1-phthalazinamine, and EMD121974.

Combinations with compounds other than anti-cancer compounds are also encompassed in the instant methods. For example, combinations of the present compounds with PPAR-γ (i.e., PPAR-gamma) agonists and PPAR-δ (i.e., PPAR-delta) agonists are useful in the treatment of certain malingnancies. PPAR-γ and PPAR-δ are the nuclear peroxisome proliferator-activated receptors γ and δ. The expression of PPAR-γ on endothelial cells and its involvement in angiogenesis has been reported in the literature (see J. Cardiovasc. Pharmacol. 1998; 31:909-913; J. Biol. Chem. 1999; 274:9116-9121; Invest. Opthalmol. Vis. Sci. 2000; 41:2309-2317). More recently, PPAR-γ agonists have been shown to inhibit the angiogenic response to VEGF in vitro; both troglitazone and rosiglitazone maleate inhibit the development of retinal neovascularization in mice (Arch. Ophthamol. 2001; 119:709-717). Examples of PPAR-γ agonists and PPAR-γ/α agonists include, but are not limited to, thiazolidinediones (such as DRF2725, CS-011, troglitazone, rosiglitazone, and pioglitazone), fenofibrate, gemfibrozil, clofibrate, GW2570, SB219994, AR-H039242, JTT-501, MCC-555, GW2331, GW409544, NN2344, KRP297, NP0110, DRF4158, NN622, GI262570, PNU182716, DRF552926, 2-[(5,7-dipropyl-3-trifluoromethyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl)oxy]-2-methylpropionic acid, and 2(R)-7-(3-(2-chloro-4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenoxy)propoxy)-2-ethylchromane-2-carboxylic acid.

In one embodiment, useful anti-cancer (also known as anti-neoplastic) agents that can be used in combination with the present compounds include, but are not limited, to Uracil mustard, Chlormethine, Ifosfamide, Melphalan, Chlorambucil, Pipobroman, Triethylenemelamine, Triethylenethiophosphoramine, Busulfan, Carmustine, Lomustine, Streptozocin, Dacarbazine, Floxuridine, Cytarabine, 6-Mercaptopurine, 6-Thioguanine, Fludarabine phosphate, oxaliplatin, leucovirin, oxaliplatin (ELOXATIN™ from Sanofi-Synthelabo Pharmaeuticals, France), Pentostatine, Vinblastine, Vincristine, Vindesine, Bleomycin, Dactinomycin, Daunorubicin, Doxorubicin, Epirubicin, Idarubicin, Mithramycin, Deoxycoformycin, Mitomycin-C, L-Asparaginase, Teniposide 17α-Ethinylestradiol, Diethylstilbestrol, Testosterone, Prednisone, Fluoxymesterone, Dromostanolone propionate, Testolactone, Megestrolacetate, Methylprednisolone, Methyltestosterone, Prednisolone, Triamcinolone, Chlorotrianisene, Hydroxyprogesterone, Aminoglutethimide, Estramustine, Medroxyprogesteroneacetate, Leuprolide, Flutamide, Toremifene, goserelin, Cisplatin, Carboplatin, Hydroxyurea, Amsacrine, Procarbazine, Mitotane, Mitoxantrone, Levamisole, Navelbene, Anastrazole, Letrazole, Capecitabine, Reloxafine, Droloxafine, Hexamethylmelamine, doxorubicin (adriamycin), cyclophosphamide (cytoxan), gemcitabine, interferons, pegylated interferons, Erbitux and a mixture of two or more thereof.

Another embodiment of the present invention is the use of the present compounds in combination with gene therapy for the treatment of cancer. For an overview of genetic strategies to treating cancer, see Hall et al (Am J Hum Genet 61:785-789, 1997) and Kufe et al (Cancer Medicine, 5th Ed, pp 876-889, B C Decker, Hamilton 2000). Gene therapy can be used to deliver any tumor suppressing gene. Examples of such genes include, but are not limited to, p53, which can be delivered via recombinant virus-mediated gene transfer (see U.S. Pat. No. 6,069,134, for example), a uPA/uPAR antagonist (“Adenovirus-Mediated Delivery of a uPA/uPAR Antagonist Suppresses Angiogenesis-Dependent Tumor Growth and Dissemination in Mice,” Gene Therapy, August 1998; 5(8):1105-13), and interferon gamma (J Immunol 2000; 164:217-222).

The present compounds can also be administered in combination with one or more inhibitor of inherent multidrug resistance (MDR), in particular MDR associated with high levels of expression of transporter proteins. Such MDR inhibitors include inhibitors of p-glycoprotein (P-gp), such as LY335979, XR9576, OC144-093, R101922, VX853 and PSC833 (valspodar).

The present compounds can also be employed in conjunction with one or more anti-emetic agents to treat nausea or emesis, including acute, delayed, late-phase, and anticipatory emesis, which may result from the use of a compound of the present invention, alone or with radiation therapy. For the prevention or treatment of emesis, a compound of the present invention may be used in conjunction with one or more other anti-emetic agents, especially neurokinin-1 receptor antagonists, 5HT3 receptor, antagonists, such as ondansetron, granisetron, tropisetron, and zatisetron, GABAB receptor agonists, such as baclofen, a corticosteroid such as Decadron (dexamethasone), Kenalog, Aristocort, Nasalide, Preferid, Benecorten or those as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,789,118, 2,990,401, 3,048,581, 3,126,375, 3,929,768, 3,996,359, 3,928,326 and 3,749,712, an antidopaminergic, such as the phenothiazines (for example prochlorperazine, fluphenazine, thioridazine and mesoridazine), metoclopramide or dronabinol. In one embodiment, an anti-emesis agent selected from a neurokinin-1 receptor antagonist, a 5HT3 receptor antagonist and a corticosteroid is administered as an adjuvant for the treatment or prevention of emesis that may result upon administration of the present compounds.

Examples of neurokinin-1 receptor antagonists that can be used in conjunction with the present compounds are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,162,339, 5,232,929, 5,242,930, 5,373,003, 5,387,595, 5,459,270, 5,494,926, 5,496,833, 5,637,699, and 5,719,147, content of which are incorporated herein by reference. In an embodiment, the neurokinin-1 receptor antagonist for use in conjunction with the compounds of the present invention is selected from: 2-(R)-(1-(R)-(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)ethoxy)-3-(S)-(4-fluorophenyl)-4-(3-(5-oxo-1H,4H-1,2,4-triazolo)methyl)morpholine, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, which is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,719,147.

A compound of the present invention may also be administered with one or more immunologic-enhancing drug, such as for example, levamisole, isoprinosine and Zadaxin.

Thus, the present invention encompasses the use of the present compounds (for example, for treating or preventing cellular proliferative diseases) in combination with a second compound selected from: an estrogen receptor modulator, an androgen receptor modulator, retinoid receptor modulator, a cytotoxic/cytostatic agent, an antiproliferative agent, a prenyl-protein transferase inhibitor, an HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor, an angiogenesis inhibitor, a PPAR-γ agonist, a PPAR-δ agonist, an inhibitor of inherent multidrug resistance, an anti-emetic agent, an immunologic-enhancing drug, an inhibitor of cell proliferation and survival signaling, an agent that interfers with a cell cycle checkpoint, and an apoptosis inducing agent.

In one embodiment, the present invention emcompasses the composition and use of the present compounds in combination with a second compound selected from: a cytostatic agent, a cytotoxic agent, taxanes, a topoisomerase II inhibitor, a topoisomerase I inhibitor, a tubulin interacting agent, hormonal agent, a thymidilate synthase inhibitors, anti-metabolites, an alkylating agent, a farnesyl protein transferase inhibitor, a signal transduction inhibitor, an EGFR kinase inhibitor, an antibody to EGFR, a C-abl kinase inhibitor, hormonal therapy combinations, and aromatase combinations.

The term “treating cancer” or “treatment of cancer” refers to administration to a mammal afflicted with a cancerous condition and refers to an effect that alleviates the cancerous condition by killing the cancerous cells, but also to an effect that results in the inhibition of growth and/or metastasis of the cancer.

In one embodiment, the angiogenesis inhibitor to be used as the second compound is selected from a tyrosine kinase inhibitor, an inhibitor of epidermal-derived growth factor, an inhibitor of fibroblast-derived growth factor, an inhibitor of platelet derived growth factor, an MW (matrix metalloprotease) inhibitor, an integrin blocker, interferon-α, interleukin-12, pentosan polysulfate, a cyclooxygenase inhibitor, carboxyamidotriazole, combretastatin A-4, squalamine, 6-(O-chloroacetylcarbonyl)-fumagillol, thalidomide, angiostatin, troponin-1, or an antibody to VEGF. In an embodiment, the estrogen receptor modulator is tamoxifen or raloxifene.

Also included in the present invention is a method of treating cancer comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of the present invention in combination with radiation therapy and at least one compound selected from: an estrogen receptor modulator, an androgen receptor modulator, retinoid receptor modulator, a cytotoxic/cytostatic agent, an antiproliferative agent, a prenyl-protein transferase inhibitor, an HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor, an angiogenesis inhibitor, a PPAR-γ agonist, a PPAR-δ agonist, an inhibitor of inherent multidrug resistance, an anti-emetic agent, an immunologic-enhancing drag, an inhibitor of cell proliferation and survival signaling, an agent that interfers with a cell cycle checkpoint, and an apoptosis inducing agent.

Yet another embodiment of the invention is a method of treating cancer comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of the present invention in combination with paclitaxel or trastuzumab.

The present invention also includes a pharmaceutical composition useful for treating or preventing the various disease states mentioned herein cellular proliferation diseases (such as cancer, hyperplasia, cardiac hypertrophy, autoimmune diseases, fungal disorders, arthritis, graft rejection, inflammatory bowel disease, immune disorders, inflammation, and cellular proliferation induced after medical procedures) that comprises a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of the present invention and at least one compound selected from: an estrogen receptor modulator, an androgen receptor modulator, a retinoid receptor modulator, a cytotoxic/cytostatic agent, an antiproliferative agent, a prenyl-protein transferase inhibitor, an HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor, an angiogenesis inhibitor, a PPAR-γ agonist, a PPAR-δ agonist, an inhibitor of cell proliferation and survival signaling, an agent that interfers with a cell cycle checkpoint, and an apoptosis inducing agent.

When the disease being treated by the cathepsin inhibitor compounds of the present invention is inflammatory disease, an embodiment of the present invention comprises administering: (a) a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of the present cathepsin inhibitors (e.g., a compound according to Formula I-XXVIII) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof concurrently or sequentially with (b) at least one medicament selected from the group consisting of: disease modifying antirheumatic drugs; nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs; COX-2 selective inhibitors; COX-1 inhibitors; immunosuppressives (non-limiting examples include methotrexate, cyclosporin, FK506); steroids; PDE IV inhibitors, anti-TNF-α compounds, TNF-alpha-convertase inhibitors, cytokine inhibitors, MMP inhibitors, glucocorticoids, chemokine inhibitors, CB2-selective inhibitors, p38 inhibitors, biological response modifiers; anti-inflammatory agents and therapeutics.

Another embodiment of the present invention is directed to a method of inhibiting or blocking T-cell mediated chemotaxis in a patient in need of such treatment the method comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of the present cathepsin inhibitors (e.g., a compound according to formula I-XXVIII) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof.

Another embodiment of this invention is directed to a method of treating inflammatory bowel disease in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound according to the present cathepsin inhibitors or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof.

Another embodiment of this invention is directed to a method of treating or preventing graft rejection in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound according to the present cathepsin inhibitors, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof.

Another embodiment of this invention is directed to a method comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of: (a) at least one compound according to the present cathepsin inhibitors, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof concurrently or sequentially with (b) at least one compound selected from the group consisting of: cyclosporine A, FK-506, FTY720, beta-Interferon, rapamycin, mycophenolate, prednisolone, azathioprine, cyclophosphamide and an antilymphocyte globulin.

Another embodiment of this invention is directed to a method of treating multiple sclerosis in a patient in need of such treatment the method comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of: (a) at least one compound according to the present cathepsin inhibitors, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof concurrently or sequentially with (b) at least one compound selected from the group consisting of: beta-interferon, glatiramer acetate, glucocorticoids, methotrexate, azothioprine, mitoxantrone, VLA-4 inhibitors and/or CB2-selective inhibitors.

Another embodiment of this invention is directed to a method of treating multiple sclerosis in a patient in need of such treatment the method comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of: a) at least one compound according to the present cathepsin inhibitors, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof concurrently or sequentially with (b) at least one compound selected from the group consisting of: methotrexate, cyclosporin, leflunimide, sulfasalazine, β-methasone, β-interferon, glatiramer acetate, prednisone, etonercept, and infliximab.

Another embodiment of this invention is directed to a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis in a patient in need of such treatment the method comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of: (a) at least one compound according to the present cathepsin inhibitors or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof concurrently or sequentially with (b) at least one compound selected from the group consisting of: COX-2 inhibitors, COX inhibitors, immunosuppressives, steroids, PDE IV inhibitors, anti-TNF-α compounds, MMP inhibitors, glucocorticoids, chemokine inhibitors, CB2-selective inhibitors, caspase (ICE) inhibitors and other classes of compounds indicated for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis.

Another embodiment of this invention is directed to a method of treating psoriasis in a patient in need of such treatment the method comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of: a) at least one compound according to present cathepsin inhibitors, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof concurrently or sequentially with (b) at least one compound selected from the group consisting of: immunosuppressives, steroids, and anti-TNF-α compounds.

Another embodiment of this invention is directed to a method of treating a disease selected from the group consisting of: inflammatory disease, rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, graft rejection, psoriasis, fixed drug eruptions, cutaneous delayed-type hypersensitivity responses, tuberculoid leprosy, type I diabetes, viral meningitis and tumors in a patient in need of such treatment, such method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of at least one compound according to present cathepsin inhibitors, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof.

Another embodiment of this invention is directed to a method of treating a disease selected from the group consisting of inflammatory disease, rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, graft rejection, psoriasis, fixed drug eruptions, cutaneous delayed-type hypersensitivity responses, tuberculoid leprosy and cancer in a patient in need of such treatment, such method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of at least one compound according to the present cathepsin inhibitors, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof.

Another embodiment of this invention is directed to a method of treating a disease selected from the group consisting of inflammatory disease, rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, graft rejection, psoriasis, fixed drug eruptions, cutaneous delayed-type hypersensitivity responses and tuberculoid leprosy, type I diabetes, viral meningitis and cancer in a patient in need of such treatment, such method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of (a) at least one compound according to the present cathepsin inhibitors, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof concurrently or sequentially with (b) at least one medicament selected from the group consisting of: disease modifying antirheumatic drugs; nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs; COX-2 selective inhibitors; COX-1 inhibitors; immunosuppressives; steroids; PDE IV inhibitors, anti-TNF-α compounds, MMP inhibitors, glucocorticoids, chemokine inhibitors, CB2-selective inhibitors, biological response modifiers; anti-inflammatory agents and therapeutics.

When the present invention involves a method of treating a cardiovascular disease, in addition to administering the cathepsin inhibitors of the present invention, the method further comprises administering to the subject in need one or more pharmacological or therapeutic agents or drugs such as cholesterol biosynthesis inhibitors and/or lipid-lowering agents discussed below.

Non-limiting examples of cholesterol biosynthesis inhibitors for use in the compositions, therapeutic combinations and methods of the present invention include competitive inhibitors of HMG CoA reductase, the rate-limiting step in cholesterol biosynthesis, squalene synthase inhibitors, squalene epoxidase inhibitors and a mixture of two or more thereof. Non-limiting examples of suitable HMG CoA reductase inhibitors include statins such as lovastatin (for example MEVACOR® which is available from Merck & Co.), pravastatin (for example PRAVACHOL® which is available from Bristol Meyers Squibb), fluvastatin, simvastatin (for example ZOCOR® which is available from Merck & Co.), atorvastatin, cerivastatin, rosuvastatin, rivastatin (sodium 7-(4-fluorophenyl)-2,6-diisopropyl-5-methoxymethylpyridin-3-yl)-3,5-dihydroxy-6-heptanoate, CI-981 and pitavastatin (such as NK-104 of Negma Kowa of Japan); HMG CoA synthetase inhibitors, for example L-659,699 ((E,E)-11-[3′R-(hydroxy-methyl)-4′-oxo-2′R-oxetanyl]-3,5,7R-trimethyl-2,4-undecadienoic acid); squalene synthesis inhibitors, for example squalestatin 1; and squalene epoxidase inhibitors, for example, NB-598 ((E)-N-ethyl-N-(6, 6-dimethyl-2-hepten-4-ynyl)-3-[(3,3′-bithiophen-5-yl)methoxy]benzene-methanamine hydrochloride) and other sterol biosynthesis inhibitors such as DMP-565. Preferred HMG CoA reductase inhibitors include lovastatin, pravastatin and simvastatin.

In another embodiment, the method of treatment comprises administering the present cathepsin inhibitors in combination with one or more cardiovascular agents and one or more cholesterol biosynthesis inhibitors.

In another alternative embodiment, the method treatment of the present invention can further comprise administering nicotinic acid (niacin) and/or derivatives thereof coadministered with or in combination with the cardiovascular agent(s) and sterol absorption inhibitor(s) discussed above.

As used herein, “nicotinic acid derivative” means a compound comprising a pyridine-3-carboxylate structure or a pyrazine-2-carboxylate structure, including acid forms, salts, esters, zwitterions and tautomers, where available. Examples of nicotinic acid derivatives include niceritrol, nicofuranose and acipimox (5-methyl pyrazine-2-carboxylic acid 4-oxide). Nicotinic acid and its derivatives inhibit hepatic production of VLDL and its metabolite LDL and increases HDL and apo A-1 levels. An example of a suitable nicotinic acid product is NIASPAN® (niacin extended-release tablets) which are available from Kos.

In another alternative embodiment, the method of treatment of the present invention can further comprise administering one or more AcylCoA:Cholesterol O-acyltransferase (“ACAT”) Inhibitors, which can reduce LDL and VLDL levels, coadministered with or in combination with the cardiovascular agent(s) and sterol absorption inhibitor(s) discussed above. ACAT is an enzyme responsible for esterifying excess intracellular cholesterol and may reduce the synthesis of VLDL, which is a product of cholesterol esterification, and overproduction of apo B-100-containing lipoproteins.

Non-limiting examples of useful ACAT inhibitors include avasimibe ([[2,4,6-tris(1-methylethyl)phenyl]acetyl]sulfamic acid, 2,6-bis(1-methylethyl)phenyl ester, formerly known as CI-1011), HL-004, lecimibide (DuP-128) and CL-277082 (N-(2,4-difluorophenyl)-N-[[4-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)phenyl]methyl]-N-heptylurea). See P. Chang et al., “Current, New and Future Treatments in Dyslipidaemia and Atherosclerosis”, Drugs 2000 July; 60(1); 55-93, which is incorporated by reference herein.

In another alternative embodiment, the method of treatment of the present invention can further comprise administering probucol or derivatives thereof (such as AGI-1067 and other derivatives disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,121,319 and 6,147,250), which can reduce LDL levels, coadministered with or in combination with the cardiovascular agent(s) and sterol absorption inhibitor(s) discussed above.

In another alternative embodiment, the method of treatment of the present invention can further comprise administering fish oil, which contains Omega 3 fatty acids (3-PUFA), which can reduce VLDL and triglyceride levels, coadministered with or in combination with the cardiovascular agent(s) and sterol absorption inhibitor(s) discussed above. Generally, a total daily dosage of fish oil or Omega 3 fatty acids can range from about 1 to about 30 grams per day in single or 2-4 divided doses.

In another alternative embodiment, the method of treatment of the present invention can further comprise administering natural water soluble fibers, such as psyllium, guar, oat and pectin, which can reduce cholesterol levels, coadministered with or in combination with the cardiovascular agent(s) and sterol absorption inhibitor(s) discussed above. Generally, a total daily dosage of natural water soluble fibers can range from about 0.1 to about 10 grams per day in single or 2-4 divided doses.

In another alternative embodiment, the method of treatment of the present invention can further comprise administering plant sterols, plant stanols and/or fatty acid esters of plant stanols, such as sitostanol ester used in BENECOL® margarine, which can reduce cholesterol levels, coadministered with or in combination with the cardiovascular agent(s) and sterol absorption inhibitor(s) discussed above. Generally, a total daily dosage of plant sterols, plant stanols and/or fatty acid esters of plant stanols can range from about 0.5 to about 20 grams per day in single or 2-4 divided doses.

In another alternative embodiment, the method of treatment of the present invention can further comprise administering antioxidants, such as probucol, tocopherol, ascorbic acid, β-carotene and selenium, or vitamins such as vitamin B₆ or vitamin B₁₂, coadministered with or in combination with the cardiovascular agent(s) and sterol absorption inhibitor(s) discussed above. Generally, a total daily dosage of antioxidants or vitamins can range from about 0.05 to about 10 grams per day in single or 2-4 divided doses.

In another alternative embodiment, the method of treatment of the present invention can further comprise administering one or more bile acid sequestrants (insoluble anion exchange resins), coadministered with or in combination with the cardiovascular agents and sterol absorption inhibitor(s) discussed above.

Bile acid sequestrants bind bile acids in the intestine, interrupting the enterohepatic circulation of bile acids and causing an increase in the faecal excretion of steroids. Use of bile acid sequestrants is desirable because of their non-systemic mode of action. Bile acid sequestrants can lower intrahepatic cholesterol and promote the synthesis of apo B/E (LDL) receptors which bind LDL from plasma to further reduce cholesterol levels in the blood.

Non-limiting examples of suitable bile acid sequestrants include cholestyramine (a styrene-divinylbenzene copolymer containing quaternary ammonium cationic groups capable of binding bile acids, such as QUESTRAN® or QUESTRAN LIGHT® cholestyramine which are available from Bristol-Myers Squibb), colestipol (a copolymer of diethylenetriamine and 1-chloro-2,3-epoxypropane, such as COLESTID® tablets which are available from Pharmacia), colesevelam hydrochloride (such as WelChol® Tablets (poly(allylamine hydrochloride) cross-linked with epichlorohydrin and alkylated with 1-bromodecane and (6-bromohexyl)-trimethylammonium bromide) which are available from Sankyo), water soluble derivatives such as 3,3-ioene, N-(cycloalkyl)alkylamines and poliglusam, insoluble quaternized polystyrenes, saponins and a mixture of two or more thereof. Other useful bile acid sequestrants are disclosed in PCT Patent Applications Nos. WO 97/11345 and WO 98/57652, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,692,895 and 5,703,188 which are incorporated herein by reference. Suitable inorganic cholesterol sequestrants include bismuth salicylate plus montmorillonite clay, aluminum hydroxide and calcium carbonate antacids.

Also useful with the present invention are methods of treatment that can further comprise administering at least one (one or more) activators for peroxisome proliferator-activated receptors (PPAR). These activators act as agonists for the peroxisome proliferator-activated receptors. Three subtypes of PPAR have been identified, and these are designated as peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor alpha (PPARδ), peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor gamma (PPARγ) and peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor delta (PPARδ). It should be noted that PPARδ is also referred to in the literature as PPARβ and as NUC1, and each of these names refers to the same receptor.

PPARα regulates the metabolism of lipids. PPARα is activated by fibrates and a number of medium and long-chain fatty acids, and it is involved in stimulating β-oxidation of fatty acids. The PPARγ receptor subtypes are involved in activating the program of adipocyte differentiation and are not involved in stimulating peroxisome proliferation in the liver. PPARδ has been identified as being useful in increasing high density lipoprotein (HDL) levels in humans. See, e.g., WO 97/28149.

PPARα activator compounds are useful for, among other things, lowering triglycerides, moderately lowering LDL levels and increasing HDL levels. Useful examples of PPARα activators include the fibrates discussed above.

Other examples of PPARα activators useful with the practice of the present invention include suitable fluorophenyl compounds as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,028,109 which is incorporated herein by reference; certain substituted phenylpropionic compounds as disclosed in WO 00/75103 which is incorporated herein by reference; and PPARα activator compounds as disclosed in WO 98/43081 which is incorporated herein by reference.

Non-limiting examples of PPARγ activator include suitable derivatives of glitazones or thiazolidinediones, such as, troglitazone (such as REZULIN® troglitazone (-5-[[4-[3,4-d]hydro-6-hydroxy-2,5,7,8-tetramethyl-2H-1-benzopyran-2-yl)methoxy]phenyl]methyl]-2,4-thiazolidinedione) commercially available from Parke-Davis); rosiglitazone (such as AVANDIA® rosiglitazone maleate (-5-[[4-[2-(methyl-2-pyridinylamino)ethoxy]phenyl]methyl]-2,4-thiazolidinedione, (Z)-2-butenedioate) (1:1) commercially available from SmithKline Beecham) and pioglitazone (such as ACTOS™ pioglitazone hydrochloride (5-[[4-[2-(5-ethyl-2-pyridinyl)ethoxy]phenyl]methyl]-2,4-]thiazolidinedione monohydrochloride) commercially available from Takeda Pharmaceuticals). Other useful thiazolidinediones include ciglitazone, englitazone, darglitazone and BRL 49653 as disclosed in WO 98/05331 which is incorporated herein by reference; PPARγ activator compounds disclosed in WO 00/76488 which is incorporated herein by reference; and PPARγ activator compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,994,554 which is incorporated herein by reference.

Other useful classes of PPARγ activator compounds include certain acetylphenols as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,859,051 which is incorporated herein by reference; certain quinoline phenyl compounds as disclosed in WO 99/20275 which is incorporated herein by reference; aryl compounds as disclosed by WO 99/38845 which is incorporated herein by reference; certain 1,4-disubstituted phenyl compounds as disclosed in WO 00/63161; certain aryl compounds as disclosed in WO 01/00579 which is incorporated herein by reference; benzoic acid compounds as disclosed in WO 01/12612 & WO 01/12187 which are incorporated herein by reference; and substituted 4-hydroxy-phenylalconic acid compounds as disclosed in WO 97/31907 which is incorporated herein by reference.

PPARδ compounds are useful for, among other things, lowering triglyceride levels or raising HDL levels. Non-limiting examples of PPARδ activators include suitable thiazole and oxazole derivates, such as C.A.S. Registry No. 317318-32-4, as disclosed in WO 01/00603 which is incorporated herein by reference); certain fluoro, chloro or thio phenoxy phenylacetic acids as disclosed in WO 97/28149 which is incorporated herein by reference; suitable non-β-oxidizable fatty acid analogues as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,093,365 which is incorporated herein by reference; and PPARδ compounds as disclosed in WO 99/04815 which is incorporated herein by reference.

Moreover, compounds that have multiple functionality for activating various combinations of PPARα, PPARγ and PPARδ are also useful with the practice of the present invention. Non-limiting examples include certain substituted aryl compounds as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,248,781; WO 00/23416; WO 00/23415; WO 00/23425; WO 00/23445; WO 00/23451; and WO 00/63153, all of which are incorporated herein by reference, are described as being useful PPARα and/or PPARγ activator compounds. Other non-limiting examples of useful PPARα and/or PPARγ activator compounds include activator compounds as disclosed in WO 97/25042 which is incorporated herein by reference; activator compounds as disclosed in WO 00/63190 which is incorporated herein by reference; activator compounds as disclosed in WO 01/21181 which is incorporated herein by reference; biaryl-oxa(thia)zole compounds as disclosed in WO 01/16120 which is incorporated herein by reference; compounds as disclosed in WO 00/63196 and WO 00/63209 which are incorporated herein by reference; substituted 5-aryl-2,4-thiazolidinediones compounds as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,008,237 which is incorporated herein by reference; arylthiazolidinedione and aryloxazolidinedione compounds as disclosed in WO 00/78312 and WO 00/78313G which are incorporated herein by reference; GW2331 or (2-(4-[difluorophenyl]-1heptylureido)ethyl]phenoxy)-2-methylbutyric compounds as disclosed in WO 98/05331 which is incorporated herein by reference; aryl compounds as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,166,049 which is incorporated herein by reference; oxazole compounds as disclosed in WO 01/17994 which is incorporated herein by reference; and dithiolane compounds as disclosed in WO 01/25225 and WO 01/25226 which are incorporated herein by reference.

Other useful PPAR activator compounds include substituted benzylthiazolidine-2,4-dione compounds as disclosed in WO 01/14349, WO 01/14350 and WO/01/04351 which are incorporated herein by reference; mercaptocarboxylic compounds as disclosed in WO 00/50392 which is incorporated herein by reference; ascofuranone compounds as disclosed in WO 00/53563 which is incorporated herein by reference; carboxylic compounds as disclosed in WO 99/46232 which is incorporated herein by reference; compounds as disclosed in WO 99/12534 which is incorporated herein by reference; benzene compounds as disclosed in WO 99/15520 which is incorporated herein by reference; o-anisamide compounds as disclosed in WO 01/21578 which is incorporated herein by reference; and PPAR activator compounds as disclosed in WO 01/40192 which is incorporated herein by reference.

Also useful with the present invention are methods of treatment which further comprise administering hormone replacement agents and compositions. Useful hormone agents and compositions for hormone replacement therapy of the present invention include androgens, estrogens, progestins, their pharmaceutically acceptable salts and derivatives. Combinations of these agents and compositions are also useful.

The cathepsin inhibitors of the present invention are useful in the treatment of central nervous system diseases such as depression, cognitive function diseases and neurodegenerative diseases such as Parkinson's disease, senile dementia as in Alzheimer's disease, and psychoses of organic origin. In particular, the cathepsin inhibitors of the present invention can improve motor-impairment due to neurodegenerative diseases such as Parkinson's disease.

The other agents known to be useful in the treatment of Parkinson's disease which can be administered in combination with the cathepsin inhibitors of the present invention include: L-DOPA; dopaminergic agonists such as quinpirole, ropinirole, pramipexole, pergolide and bromocriptine; MAO-B inhibitors such as deprenyl and selegiline; DOPA decarboxylase inhibitors such as carbidopa and benserazide; and COMT inhibitors such as tolcapone and entacapone.

A preferred dosage for the administration of a compound of the present invention is about 0.001 to 500 mg/kg of body weight/day of a compound of the present invention or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof. An especially preferred dosage is about 0.01 to 25 mg/kg of body weight/day of a compound of the present invention or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof.

The phrases “effective amount” and “therapeutically effective amount” mean that amount of a compound of the present invention, and other pharmacological or therapeutic agents described herein, that will elicit a biological or medical response of a tissue, a system, or a subject (e.g., animal or human) that is being sought by the administrator (such as a researcher, doctor or veterinarian) which includes alleviation of the symptoms of the condition or disease being treated and the prevention, slowing or halting of progression of one or more of the presently claimed diseases. The formulations or compositions, combinations and treatments of the present invention can be administered by any suitable means which produce contact of these compounds with the site of action in the body of, for example, a mammal or human.

For administration of pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the above compounds, the weights indicated above refer to the weight of the acid equivalent or the base equivalent of the therapeutic compound derived from the salt.

As described above, this invention includes combinations comprising an amount of at least one compound of the presently claimed methods or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof, and an amount of one or more additional therapeutic agents listed above (administered together or sequentially) wherein the amounts of the compounds/treatments result in desired therapeutic effect.

When administering a combination therapy to a patient in need of such administration, the therapeutic agents in the combination, or a pharmaceutical composition or compositions comprising the therapeutic agents, may be administered in any order such as, for example, sequentially, concurrently, together, simultaneously and the like. The amounts of the various actives in such combination therapy may be different amounts (different dosage amounts) or same amounts (same dosage amounts). Thus, for illustration purposes, a compound of the present invention and an additional therapeutic agent may be present in fixed amounts (dosage amounts) in a single dosage unit (e.g., a capsule, a tablet and the like).

If formulated as a fixed dose, such combination products employ the compounds of this invention within the dosage range described herein and the other pharmaceutically active agent or treatment within its dosage range. Compounds of the present invention may also be administered sequentially with known therapeutic agents when a combination formulation is inappropriate. The invention is not limited in the sequence of administration; compounds of the present invention may be administered either prior to or after administration of the known therapeutic agent. Such techniques are within the skills of persons skilled in the art as well as attending physicians.

The pharmacological properties of the compounds of this invention may be confirmed by a number of pharmacological assays for measuring HCV viral activity or cathepsin activity, such as are well know to those skilled in the art.

The compositions of the present invention comprise at least one compound of Formulae I to XXVIII, as defined above, together with one or more acceptable controlled-release carriers, other adjuvants or vehicles thereof and optionally other therapeutic agents. Each carrier, adjuvant or vehicle must be acceptable in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the composition and not injurious to the mammal in need of treatment.

The compositions of the present invention are formulated with one or more controlled-release carriers to provide the rate controlled-release of any one or more of the components or active ingredients to optimize the therapeutic effects, i.e. HCV inhibitory activity and the like. Suitable dosage formulations for sustained release include, inter alia, layered tablets containing layers of varying disintegration rates or controlled release polymeric matrices impregnated with the active components and shaped in tablet form or capsules containing such impregnated or encapsulated porous polymeric matrices.

Controlled-release is a term known in the medicinal art and is typically used interchangeably with sustained release, slow release, delayed release, controlled availability, slow acting, extended release, and metered release. Controlled-release is generally defined as the release of an agent from a dosage formulation slowly over a period of time, such as over hours or days. In the present invention, controlled-release is further defined as administering a predetermined dose of at least one of the compounds of Formulae I to XXVIII over a predetermined period of time.

The present invention discloses dosage formulations and methods of using the same in which a predetermined dose of at least one of the compounds of Formulae I to XXVIII is administered to maintain a suitable therapeutically efficacious trough level Cmin plasma concentration of said one compound throughout the dosing interval. Preferably, in an embodiment, the present invention discloses dosage formulations and methods of using the same in which a predetermined dose of at least one of the compounds of Formulae I to XXVIII is administered to maintain the average Cmin plasma concentration of the at least one HCV protease inhibitor at or above about 10 ng/ml. However, in other embodiments, the average Cmin plasma concentration of the at least one protease inhibitor may be maintained at or above 50 ng/ml, 100 ng/ml, 150 ng/ml or 200 ng/ml. In one embodiment, the average Cmin plasma concentration of the at least one protease inhibitor is at or above 1000 ng/ml. Cmin is generally defined as the minimum concentration of drug in plasma to obtain a predetermined intensity of response. Cmin is a measure of the concentration of drug in blood/plasma and is typically quantified at a time when the drug concentration will be near its lowest level, i.e., before the next predetermined dose of the drug. The controlled-release dosage formulation and method are intended to treat, prevent, and/or ameliorate disorders associated with HCV. The controlled-release dosage formulation and method are further intended to treat and/or reduce the signs and/or symptoms associated with HCV.

In one embodiment the rate of dissolution of the formulation can range suitably to generally allow the dissolution of from about 5% of the drug in the first 6 hours to about 80% of the drug in the first 6 hours, preferably from about 20% of the drug in the first 6 hours to about 50% of the drug in the first 6 hours. In a second embodiment the rate of dissolution of the formulation can range suitably to generally allow the dissolution of from about 25% of the drug in the first 6 hours to about 90% of the drug in the first 6 hours, preferably from about 30% of the drug in the first 6 hours to about 90% of the drug in the first 6 hours. Dissolution can be determined according to standard USP procedures well known to those skilled in the art. A non-limiting example of a suitable procedure for determining dissolution is described in the following table:

(50 mg) Dissolution Procedure

Apparatus   USP Apparatus 2 (Paddles)
Dissolution 0.5% SDS in phosphate buffer, pH 6.8, 500 mL for 50
Medium      mg strength
Temperature 37° C.
Detection   HPLC with UV detector at 220 nm wavelength

The controlled-release dosage formulation has at least one dosage unit, but may contain a plurality of dosage units, ranging from 2-100 dosage units. An oral dosage formulation may be provided, such as one of the following: tablets, capsules, or caplets. A transdermal treatment via a medicated patch may also be used as the controlled-release dosage formulation.

In one embodiment, at least one HCV protease inhibitor is selected from the group of HCV protease inhibitors referred to in the following documents (which are incorporated by reference herein): US20040048802A1, US20040043949A1, US20040001853A1, US20030008828A1, US20020182227A1, US20020177725A1, US20020150947A1, US20050267018A1, US20020034732A1, US20010034019A1, US20050153877A1, US20050074465A1, US20050053921A1, US20040253577A1, US20040229936A1, US20040229840A1, US20040077551A1, EP1408031A1, WO9837180A2, U.S. Pat. No. 6,696,281B1, JP11137252A, WO0111089A1, U.S. Pat. No. 6,280,940B1, EP1106702A1, US20050118603A1, JP2000007645A, WO0053740A1, WO0020400A1, WO2004013349A2, WO2005027871A2, WO2002100900A2, WO155703A1, US20030125541A1, US20040039187A1, U.S. Pat. No. 6,608,027B1, US20030224977A1, WO2003010141A2, WO2003007945A1, WO2002052015A2, WO0248375A2, WO0066623A2, WO0009543A2, WO9907734A2, U.S. Pat. No. 6,767,991B1, US20030187018A1, US20030186895A1, WO2004087741A1, WO2004039970A1, WO2004039833A1, WO2004037855A1, WO2004030670A1, US20040229818A1, US20040224900A1, WO2005028501 A1, WO2004103996A1, WO2004065367A1, WO2004064925A1, WO2004093915A1, WO2004009121A1, WO2003066103A1, WO2005034850A2, WO2004094452A2, WO2004015131A2, WO2003099316A1, WO2003099274A1, WO2003053349A2, WO2002060926A2, WO0040745A1, U.S. Pat. No. 6,586,615B1, WO2002061048A2, WO0248157A2, WO0248116A2, WO2005017125A2, WO0022160A1, US20060051745A1, WO2004021871A2, WO2004011647A1, WO9816657A1, U.S. Pat. No. 5,371,017A, WO9849190A2, U.S. Pat. No. 5,807,829A, WO0005243A2, WO0208251A2, WO2005067437A2, WO9918856A1, WO0004914A1, WO0212543A2, WO9845040A1, WO0140262A1, WO0102424A2, WO0196540A2, WO0164678A2, U.S. Pat. No. 5,512,391A, WO0218369A2, WO9846597A1, WO2005010029A1, WO2004113365A2, WO2004093798A2, WO2004072243A2, WO9822496A2, WO2004046159A1, JP11199509A, WO2005012288A1, WO2004108687A2, WO9740168A1, US20060110755A1, WO2002093519A2, U.S. Pat. No. 6,187,905B1, WO2003077729A2, WO9524414A1, WO2005009418A2, WO2004003000A2, US20050037018A1, WO9963998A1, WO0063444A2, WO9938888A2, WO9964442A1, WO0031129A1, WO0168818A2, WO9812308A1, WO9522985A1, WO0132691 A1, WO9708304A2, WO2002079234A1, JP10298151A, JP09206076A, JP09009961A, JP2001103993A, JP11127861A, JP11124400A, JP11124398A, WO2003051910A2, WO2004021861A2, WO9800548A1, WO2004026896A2, WO0116379A1, U.S. Pat. No. 5,861,297A, WO2004007512A2, WO2004003138A2, WO2002057287A2, WO2004009020A2, WO2004000858A2, WO2003105770A2, WO0114517A1, WO9805333A1, U.S. Pat. No. 6,280,728B1, EP1443116A1, US20040063911 A1, WO2003076466A1, WO2002087500A2, WO0190121 A2, WO2004016222A2, WO9839030A1, WO9846630A1, WO0123331A1, WO9824766A1, U.S. Pat. No. 6,168,942B1, WO0188113A2, WO2005018330A1, WO2005003147A2, WO9115596A1, WO9719103A1, WO9708194A1, WO2002055693A2, WO2005030796A1, WO2005021584A2, WO2004113295A1, WO2004113294A1, WO2004113272A1, WO2003062228A1, WO0248172A2, WO0208198A2, WO0181325A2, WO0177113A2, WO0158929A1, WO9928482A2, WO9743310A1, WO9636702A2, WO9635806A1, WO9635717A2, U.S. Pat. No. 6,326,137B1, U.S. Pat. No. 6,251,583B1, U.S. Pat. No. 5,990,276A, U.S. Pat. No. 5,759,795A, U.S. Pat. No. 5,714,371A, U.S. Pat. No. 6,524,589B1, WO0208256A2, WO0208187A1, WO2003062265A2, U.S. Pat. No. 7,012,066B2, JP07184648A, JP06315377A, WO2002100851A2, WO2002100846A1, WO0039348A1, JP06319583A, JP 11292840A, JP08205893A, WO0075338A2, WO0075337A1, WO2003059384A1, WO2002063035A2, WO2002070752A1, U.S. Pat. No. 6,190,920B1, WO2002068933A2, WO0122984A1, JP04320693A, JP2003064094A, WO0179849A2, WO0006710A1, WO0001718A2, WO0238799A2, WO2005037860A2, WO2005035525A2, WO2005025517A2, WO2005007681A2, WO2003035060A1, WO2003006490A1, WO0174768A2, WO0107027A2, WO0024725A1, WO0012727A1, WO9950230A1, WO9909148A1, WO9817679A1, WO9811134A1, WO9634976A1, WO2003087092A2, WO2005028502A1, U.S. Pat. No. 5,837,464A, DE20201549U1, WO2003090674A2, WO9727334A1, WO0034308A2, U.S. Pat. No. 6,127,116A, US20030054000A1, JP2001019699A, U.S. Pat. No. 6,596,545B1, U.S. Pat. No. 6,329,209B1, IT1299179, CA2370400, KR2002007244, KR165708, KR2000074387, KR2000033010, KR2000033011, KR2001107178, KR2001107179, ES2143918, KR2002014283, KR149198, KR2001068676. Preferably, at least one HCV protease inhibitor is a compound selected from the group of compounds of Formula I to XXVIII (described above).

Preferably, the HCV protease inhibitor is administered at a dosage range of about 1 mg to about 4000 mg per day. In one embodiment, the HCV protease inhibitor is administered at a dosage range of about 50 mg to about 4000 mg per day (e.g., 50 mg, 100 mg, 150 mg, 200 mg, 250 mg, 300 mg, 350 mg, 400 mg, 450 mg, 500 mg, 550 mg, 600 mg, 650 mg, 700 mg, 750 mg, 800 mg, 850 mg, 900 mg, 950 mg, 1000 mg, 1050 mg, 1100 mg, 1150 mg, 1200 mg, 1250 mg, 1300 mg, 1350 mg, 1400 mg, 1450 mg, 1500 mg, 1550 mg, 1600 mg, 1650 mg, 1700 mg, 1750 mg, 1800 mg, 1850 mg, 1900 mg, 1950 mg, 2000 mg, 2050 mg, 2100 mg, 2150 mg, 2200 mg, 2250 mg, 2300 mg, 2350 mg, 2400 mg, 2450 mg, 2500 mg, 2550 mg, 2600 mg, 2650 mg, 2700 mg, 2750 mg, 2800 mg, 2850 mg, 2900 mg, 2950 mg, 3000 mg, 3050 mg, 3100 mg, 3150 mg, 3200 mg, 3250 mg, 3300 mg, 3350 mg, 3400 mg, 3450 mg, 3500 mg, 3550 mg, 3600 mg, 3650 mg, 3700 mg, 3750 mg, 3800 mg, 3850 mg, 3900 mg, 3950 mg, 4000 mg per day). In one preferred embodiment, the HCV protease inhibitor is administered at a dosage range of about 400 mg to about 2500 mg per day. In another preferred embodiment, the HCV protease inhibitor is administered at a dosage range of about 1900 mg to about 4000 mg per day. In yet another preferred embodiment, the HCV protease inhibitor is administered at a dosage range of about 1050 mg to about 2850 mg per day.

In one embodiment, wherein the HCV protease inhibitor is the compound of Formula I, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof, or a mixture of two or more thereof, the HCV protease inhibitor is administered at a dosage range of about 1920 mg to about 4000 mg per day, preferably about 1920 mg to about 3000 mg per day or about 2560 mg to about 4000 mg per day.

In one embodiment, wherein the HCV protease inhibitor is the compound of Formula XXVII, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof, or a mixture of two or more thereof, the HCV protease inhibitor is administered at a dosage range of about 1080 mg to about 3125 mg per day, preferably about 1800 to about 2813 mg per day.

In one embodiment, wherein the HCV protease inhibitor is the compound of Formula XXVIII, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof, or a mixture of two or more thereof, the HCV protease inhibitor is administered at a dosage range of about 1080 mg to about 3125 mg per day, preferably about 1800 to about 2813 mg per day.

The dosage formulation may be administered once a day, twice a day, three times a day, four times a day, or more frequently. In one preferred embodiment, the dosage of HCV protease inhibitor is administered as a single dose (i.e., QD) or divided over 2-4 doses (i.e., BID, TID, or QID) per day. In one embodiment, the HCV protease inhibitor is administered at a dosage range of about 600 mg QID to about 800 mg QID. In one embodiment, wherein the HCV protease inhibitor is the compound of Formula I, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof, or a mixture of two or more thereof, the HCV protease inhibitor is administered at a dosage of 800 mg TID, 600 mg QID, or 800 mg QID. In another embodiment, wherein the HCV protease inhibitor is the compound of Formula XXVII, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof, or a mixture of two or more thereof, the HCV protease inhibitor is administered at a dosage of 750 mg TID. Likewise, in another embodiment, wherein the HCV protease inhibitor is the compound of Formula XXVIII, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof, or a mixture of two or more thereof, the HCV protease inhibitor is administered at a dosage of 750 mg TID.

Preferably, the HCV protease inhibitor is administered orally.

In one non-limiting embodiment, 400 mg of the HCV protease inhibitor is administered three times a day. However, the dosing schedule may be at from about 100 mg a day, 100 mg twice a day, 200 mg twice a day, 400 mg twice a day, 600 mg twice a day, or 600 mg three times a day. Also, as discussed herein, the amount and frequency of administration of the formulations of the present invention will be regulated according to the judgment of the attending clinician considering such factors as age, condition and size of the patient as well as severity of the symptoms being treated. A typical recommended daily dosage regimen for oral administration can range from about 50 mg/day to about 4000 mg/day, in two to four divided doses.

The quantity of active compound in a unit dose of preparation may be varied or adjusted from about 1 mg to about 1000 mg, or from about 50 mg to about 800 mg, or from about 50 mg to about 600 mg, or from about 50 mg to about 400 mg, or from about 50 mg to about 200 mg according to the particular application. In one embodiment, the dosage formulation contains about 200 mg of the active compound.

The controlled-release dosage formulation may be administered at a time of day to coincide with the circadian rhythm of the subject being treated. Circadian rhythms are endogenous oscillations that occur with a periodicity of about 24 hours, and are synchronized according to internal biologic clocks related to the sleep-wake cycle. The controlled-release dosage formulation thus may be administered in one or more discrete dosages over a twenty-four hour time interval in an asymmetric pattern as to dosage amount and/or timing of dosage, wherein the at least one HCV protease inhibitor is selected from the group consisting of compounds of Formulae I-XXVIII, as described above.

Studies of viral activity in HCV infected patients indicate that viral activity and resulting viral load are influenced by the circadian rhythm of the patient. As shown in FIG. 1, in patients treated with compound Ia of the present invention the decline in viral load is cyclical, with the viral load declining during cell division in the liver, and increasing at times when no cell division is occurring. During cell division the virus is unable to replicate, and the viral load declines. Thus, in one aspect of the invention, the one or more discrete dosages are adjusted in amount to provide a highest dose or doses at a time or times corresponding to the time interval when replication of the hepatitis-C virus is highest.

It has been determined that metabolism of compounds of the present invention is also affected by the patient's circadian rhythm. As shown in FIG. 2 (right hand box), plasma levels of the drug are highest in the morning, when measured 8 hours after the previous dose and before the morning dose is administered. Plasma levels 8 hours after the morning dose are much lower, suggesting that metabolism of the drug is faster during the day than at night.

Accordingly, in another aspect of the present invention, the one or more discrete dosages are adjusted in amount to provide a highest dose or doses at a time or times corresponding to the time interval when metabolism of the protease inhibitor is highest. In a preferred embodiment, the one or more discrete dosages is three doses, administered as one dose of 300 mg., one dose of 400 mg., and one dose of 500 mg., each dose administered every 8 hours, wherein the 500 mg. dose is administered at a time corresponding to the time interval of highest replication of the hepatitis-C virus and/or highest metabolism of the protease inhibitor. It may also be desirable to provide different patterns of dosage, such as, but not limited to 200, 300, 700; or 200, 200, 300, 500; 200, 200, 200, 600, or other combinations, depending on considerations such as the length of time that highest viral replication is occurring, metabolism of the protease inhibitor and the highest tolerated dose. One skilled in the art can determine the appropriate number of doses and dose amounts without undue experimentation.

Alternatively, and in additional embodiments, the one or more discrete dosages is administered in equal dose amounts but staggered as to timing of administration, to accommodate fluctuations in viral load and/or drug metabolism. For example, if the total desired dose over 24 hours is 1200 mg., it can be administered as a 300 mg/dose, at 8 am, 12 noon, 4 pm, and 8 pm, with a 12-hour interval between the evening dose and the morning dose. This example is non-limiting, and one skilled in the art can easily determine the appropriate number of doses and the timing of administration. In a preferred embodiment, the one or more discrete dosages is at least three doses in equal amounts, administered at unequal time intervals in twenty-four hours. The time intervals of dosage are adjusted to provide administration of one or more doses at a time or times corresponding to the time interval of highest replication of the hepatitis-C virus, or they can be adjusted to provide administration of one or more doses at a time or times corresponding to the time interval of highest metabolism of the protease inhibitor.

As will be understood by one skilled in the art, both the amount of dosage given over a 24-hour period and the timing of administration can be varied in an asymmetric pattern. The asymmetric pattern of dose amount or timing of dosage is adjusted to accommodate variations in viral replication and/or metabolism of the protease inhibitor influenced by the patient's circadian rhythm.

Further, as discussed herein, the controlled-release dosage formulation may be administered concurrently or sequentially as combination therapy with at least one of an antiviral agent and/or at least one of an immunomodulatory agent that are different from the HCV protease inhibitors disclosed in Formulae I to XXVIII. Further, the different antiviral agent(s) and/or the immunomodulatory agent(s) may be contained within the controlled-release dosage formulation with the HCV protease inhibitors disclosed in Formulae I to XXVIII. As discussed herein, the controlled-release dosage formulation may contain at least one anti-cancer agent or may be administered concurrently or sequentially with at least one anti-cancer agent.

In the pharmaceutical compositions and methods of the present invention, the active ingredients will typically be administered in admixture with suitable carrier materials suitably selected with respect to the intended form of administration, i.e. oral tablets, capsules (either solid-filled, semi-solid filled or liquid filled), powders for constitution, oral gels, elixirs, dispersible granules, syrups, suspensions, and the like, and consistent with conventional pharmaceutical practices. For example, for oral administration in the form of tablets or capsules, the active drug component may be combined with any oral non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable inert carrier, such as lactose, starch, sucrose, cellulose, magnesium stearate, dicalcium phosphate, calcium sulfate, talc, mannitol, ethyl alcohol (liquid forms) and the like. Moreover, when desired or needed, suitable binders, lubricants, disintegrating agents and coloring agents may also be incorporated in the mixture. Powders and tablets may be comprised of from about 5 to about 95 percent inventive composition.

Suitable controlled-release carrier forms include general types now known or heretofore developed in the art. Examples include and are incorporated herein by reference, but are not limited to, hydrophilic polymers as disclosed in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0156899, multi-layer release beads as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,673,367, controlled-release beads as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,770,295, coated tablets as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,990,535 and 5,100,675, matrix core tablets as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,314,697, bilayer tablets as disclosed in WO 01/45676, controlled-release beads as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,630,162, and osmotic dosage formulations as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,777,049, 4,851,229, and 5,178,867.

In one embodiment, the controlled-release dosage formulation does not enhance gastric retention.

In one non-limiting embodiment, the controlled-release carrier is a non-swellable polymer.

In one non-limiting embodiment, the controlled-release carrier a combination of swellable and non-swellable polymers.

In one non-limiting embodiment, the controlled-release carrier is a polymer that is not pH-sensitive.

In one aspect, the invention provides formulations suited for oral administration comprising one or more pH sensitive polymers that extend the time of drug delivery into both the stomach and upper GI tract for purposes of achieving a greater and more prolonged therapeutic effect where the drug is absorbed only in the upper portion of the gastrointestinal tract. pH sensitive polymers can be selected to augment drug dissolution/release at the higher pH of the intestine thereby releasing any drug remaining associated in the formulation as it is expelled from the stomach to reach the small intestine.

Accordingly, in one non-limiting embodiment, the controlled-release carrier is a pH-sensitive polymer. In one preferred embodiment, the pH-sensitive polymer is a water imbibing pH-sensitive polymer in the formulations of the invention. The use of such a pH-sensitive polymer ensures rapid volume expansion/disintegration and dissolution of any remaining drug in the dosage form that leaves the stomach earlier than anticipated and potentially would otherwise pass the absorption window before the remaining drug has had the opportunity to dissolve and be absorbed. Such water imbibing pH-sensitive polymers include, but are not limited to Carbapol 71 G, Carbopol 971 P NF, Carbopol 974 P NF, Carbopol 934 P NF, Cabopol 5984 EP, Carbopol 980 NF, Hydroxypropyl Methylcellulose Acetate Succinate. Preferably, concentrations of the polymers are 5-80% w/w. In one embodiment, in addition to the aforementioned pH-sensitive polymer that is water imbibing, another pH-sensitive polymer which is not necessarily a strong water imbibing polymer may also be included that functions to further augment pH-induced disintegration and dissolution of the formulation as it passes from the stomach to the small intestine. Such pH-sensitive polymers include, but are not limited to, hypromellose acetate succinate (HPMCAS), Eudragit L-100, Eudragit S-100, Eudragit L-30D, Euragit FS 30D, Eudragit L-100-55, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate 50, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate 55, cellulose acetate phthalate and cellulose acetate trimellate, 971 P NF, Carbopol 974 P NF, Carbopol 934 P NF. Concentrations of the polmers are 5-80% w/w.

In one non-limiting embodiment, the controlled-release carrier is a combination of polymers that are pH-sensitive and polymers that are not pH-sensitive.

In one non-limiting embodiment, the controlled-release carrier is a swellable polymer. The swellable polymer is a biocompatible or bioerodible, hydrophilic polymer, preferably a cellulosic polymer.

The term “hydrophilic” is generally defined in terms of a partition coefficient P, which is the ratio of the equilibrium concentration of a compound in an organic phase to that in an aqueous phase. A hydrophilic compound has a P value less than 1.0, typically less than about 0.5, where P is the partition coefficient of the compound between octanol and water. Hydrophilic polymeric carriers are thus compatible with aqueous fluids such as those present in the human body.

The term “polymer” as used herein refers to a molecule containing a plurality of covalently attached monomer units, and includes branched, dendrimeric and star polymers as well as linear polymers. The term also includes both homopolymers and copolymers, e.g., random copolymers, block copolymers and graft copolymers, as well as uncrosslinked polymers and slightly to moderately to substantially crosslinked polymers.

The terms “swellable” and “bioerodible” (or simply “erodible”) are used to refer to polymers that are capable of absorbing water and physically swelling as a result, with the extent to which a polymer can swell being determined by the degree of crosslinking, and “bioerodible” or “erodible” polymers referring to polymers that slowly dissolve and/or gradually hydrolyze in an aqueous fluid, and/or that physically erodes as a result of movement within the stomach or gastrointestinal tract.

In one embodiment, the controlled-release dosage formulation includes a swellable carrier that enhances stomach retention time. Prolonging residence time of the dosage form in the stomach allows dissolved drug to be presented for a prolonged period to the upper area of the gastrointestinal tract where a limited window for absorption may exist for some drugs. In particular, polymers suitable for this embodiment, are those that both swell upon absorption of gastric fluid and gradually erode over a time period of hours. Erosion initiates simultaneously with the swelling process, upon contact of the surface of the dosage formulation with gastric fluid. Erosion reflects the dissolution of the polymer beyond the polymer gel-solution interface where the polymer has become sufficiently dilute that it can be transported away from the dosage formulation by diffusion or convection. This may also depend on the hydrodynamic and mechanical forces present in the gastrointestinal tract during the digestive process. While swelling and erosion occur at the same time, it is preferred herein that drug release can be either disffuson- and or erosion-controlled, meaning that the selected polymer should be such that complete drug release occurs primarily as a result of swelling-enhanced dissolution/diffusion process, and or of erosion process. Furthermore, swelling should take place at a rate that is sufficiently fast to allow the tablet to be retained in the stomach. At minimum, for an gastro-retentive dosage formulation, there should be an extended period during which the dosage formulation maintains its size before it is diminished by erosion.

Suitable polymers for use in the present dosage formulations may be linear, branched, dendrimeric, or star polymers, and include synthetic hydrophilic polymers as well as semi-synthetic and naturally occurring hydrophilic polymers. The polymers may be homopolymers or copolymers, if copolymers, either random copolymers, block copolymers or graft copolymers. Synthetic hydrophilic polymers useful herein include, but are not limited to:

polyalkylene oxides, particularly poly(ethylene oxide), polyethylene glycol and poly(ethylene oxide)-poly(propylene oxide) copolymers;

cellulosic polymers;

acrylic acid and methacrylic acid polymers, copolymers and esters thereof, preferably formed from acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, and copolymers thereof, with each other or with additional acrylate species such as aminoethyl acrylate;

maleic anhydride copolymers;

polymaleic acid;

poly(acrylamides) such as polyacrylamide per se, poly(methacrylamide), poly(dimethylacrylamide), and poly(N-isopropyl-acrylamide);

poly(olefinic alcohol) such as poly(vinyl alcohol);

poly(N-vinyl lactams) such as poly(vinyl pyrrolidone), poly(N-vinyl caprolactam), and copolymers thereof;

polyols such as glycerol, polyglycerol (particularly highly branched polyglycerol), propylene glycol and trimethylene glycol substituted with one or more polyalkylene oxides, e.g., mono-, di- and tri-polyoxyethylated glycerol, mono- and di-polyoxyethylated propylene glycol, and mono- and di-polyoxyethylated trimethylene glycol;

polyoxyethylated sorbitol and polyoxyethylated glucose;

polyoxazolines, including poly(methyloxazoline) and poly(ethyloxazoline);

polyvinylamines;

polyvinylacetates, including polyvinylacetate per se as well as ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymers, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, and the like;

polyimines, such as polyethyleneimine;

starch and starch-based polymers;

polyurethane hydrogels;

chitosan;

polysaccharide gums;

zein; and

shellac, ammoniated shellac, shellac-acetyl alcohol, and shellac n-butyl stearate.

In a preferred embodiment of the invention, polyvinly acetate expandable hydrophilic polymers are used in the formulations of the invention. In a specific embodiment of the invention the polyvinyl acetate is provide by the excipient Kollidon SR, available from the BASF Corporation.

The term “cellulosic polymer” is used herein to denote a linear polymer of anhydroglucose. Cellulosic polymers that can be used advantageously in the present dosage formulations include, without limitation, hydroxymethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, methylcellulose, ethylcellulose, cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate phthalate, cellulose acetate trimellitate, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate, hydroxypropylcellulose phthalate, cellulose hexahydrophthalate, cellulose acetate hexahydrophthalate, carboxymethylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose sodium, and microcrystalline cellulose. Preferred cellulosic polymers are alkyl-substituted cellulosic polymers that ultimately erode/dissolve in the GI tract in a predictably delayed manner. Preferred alkyl-substituted cellulose derivatives are those substituted with alkyl groups of 1 to 3 carbon atoms each. Examples are methylcellulose, hydroxymethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, and carboxymethylcellulose and a mixture of two or more thereof. In terms of their viscosities, one class of preferred alkyl-substituted celluloses includes those whose viscosity is within the range of about 50 to about 110,000 centipoise as a 2% aqueous solution at 20° C. Another class includes those whose viscosity is within the range of about 800 to about 6,000 centipoise as a 1% aqueous solution at 20° C. Particularly preferred alkyl-substituted celluloses are hydroxyethylcellulose and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose. A presently preferred hydroxyethylcellulose is NATRASOL® 250HX NF (National Formulary), available from Aqualon Company, Wilmington, Del., USA.

Suitable polymers also include naturally occurring hydrophilic polymers such as, by way of example, proteins such as collagen, fibronectin, albumins, globulins, fibrinogen, fibrin and thrombin; aminated polysaccharides, particularly the glycosaminoglycans, e.g., hyaluronic acid, chitin, chondroitin sulfate A, B, or C, keratin sulfate, keratosulfate and heparin; guar gum; xanthan gum; carageenan; alginates; pectin; and activated polysaccharides such as dextran and starches.

The aforementioned list of polymers is not exhaustive, and a variety of other synthetic hydrophilic polymers may be used, as will be appreciated by those skilled in the art.

The polymer may include biodegradable segments and blocks, either distributed throughout the polymer's molecular structure or present as a single block, as in a block copolymer. Biodegradable segments are those that degrade so as to break covalent bonds. Typically, biodegradable segments are segments that are hydrolyzed in the presence of water. Biodegradable segments may be composed of small molecular segments such as ester linkages, anhydride linkages, ortho ester linkages, ortho carbonate linkages, amide linkages, phosphonate linkages, etc.

Any polymer or polymers of the matrix may also be crosslinked, with the degree of crosslinking directly affecting the rate of polymer swelling as well as the erosion rate. That is, a polymer having a higher degree of crosslinking will exhibit less swelling and slower erosion than a polymer having a lower degree of crosslinking. Crosslinked polymers may be prepared using the above-mentioned exemplary polymers using conventional crosslinking procedures (e.g., chemical crosslinking with an added crosslinking agent, photolytically induced crosslinking, etc.), or the polymers may be obtained commercially in crosslinked form.

The water-swellable polymers can be used individually or in combination. Certain combinations will often provide a more controlled release of the drug than their components when used individually. Examples include, but are not limited to, the following: a cellulosic polymer combined with a gum, such as hydroxyethylcellulose or hydroxypropylcellulose combined with xanthan gum; a polyalkylene oxide combined with a gum, such as poly(ethylene oxide) combined with xanthan gum; and a polyalkylene oxide combined with a cellulosic polymer, such as poly(ethylene oxide) combined with hydroxyethylcellulose or hydroxypropylcellulose.

Combinations of different poly(ethylene oxide)s are also contemplated, with polymers of different molecular weights contributing to different dosage formulation characteristics. For example, a very high molecular weight poly(ethylene oxide) such as Polyox® 303 (with a number average molecular weight of 7 million) or Polyox® Coag (with a number average molecular weight of 5 million) may be used to significantly enhance diffusion relative to disintegration release by providing high swelling as well as tablet integrity. Incorporating a lower molecular weight poly(ethylene oxide) such as Polyox® WSR N-60K (number average molecular weight approximately 2 million) with Polyox® 303 and/or Polyox® Coag increases disintegration rate relative to diffusion rate, as the lower molecular weight polymer reduces swelling and acts as an effective tablet disintegrant. Incorporating an even lower molecular weight poly(ethylene oxide) such as Polyox® WSR N-80 (number average molecular weight approximately 200,000) further increases disintegration rate.

The hydrophilicity and water swellability of these polymers cause the drug-containing matrices to swell in size in the gastric cavity due to ingress of water in order to achieve a size that will be retained in the stomach when introduced during the fed mode. These qualities also cause the matrices to become slippery, which provides resistance to peristalsis and further promotes their retention in the stomach. The release rate of a drug from the matrix is primarily dependent upon the rate of water imbibition and the rate at which the drug dissolves and diffuses from the swollen polymer, which in turn is related to the solubility and dissolution rate of the drug, the drug particle size and the drug concentration in the matrix.

The amount of polymer relative to the drug can vary, depending on the drug release rate desired and on the polymer, its molecular weight, and excipients that may be present in the formulation. The amount of polymer will be sufficient however to retain at least about 40% of the drug within the matrix one hour after ingestion (or immersion in the gastric fluid). Preferably, the amount of polymer is such that at least 50% of the drug remains in the matrix one hour after ingestion. More preferably, at least 60%, and most preferably at least 80%, of the drug remains in the matrix one hour after ingestion. In all cases, however, substantially all of the drug will be released from the matrix within about eight hours, and preferably within about six hours, after ingestion, “substantially all” meaning at least 85%, preferably at least 90%.

Higher molecular weight polymers may be preferred to provide a desired extended release profile using the present dosage formulations. Suitable molecular weights are generally in the range of about 5,000 to about 20,000,000. For sparingly soluble drugs, the polymers have molecular weights preferably in the range of about 5,000 to about 8,000,000, more preferably in the range of about 10,000 to about 5,000,000. For water-soluble drugs, the polymers preferably have molecular weights of at least about 10,000, but the molecular weight used will vary with the selected polymer. For example, for hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, the minimum molecular weight may be as low as 10,000, while for poly(ethylene oxide)s the molecular weight may be far higher, on the order of 2,000,000 or more.

The swellable polymer used as the controlled-release dosage formulation carrier is preferably present in an amount to obtain a weight gain level of the dosage formulation from about 1 to 90 percent, or about 2 to 50 percent, or more preferably about 2 to 25 percent. The swellable polymer used as the controlled-release dosage formulation carrier is also preferably present at from about 1 to 99 weight percent (wt. %), or about 2 to 98 weight percent (wt. %), or more preferably about 20 to 90 weight percent (wt. %).

The formulations of the present invention comprise at least one HCV protease inhibitor, as defined above, together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable adjuvants and optionally other therapeutic agents and pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and excipients. Each excipient must be acceptable in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the mammal in need of treatment.

In yet another embodiment, the present invention discloses methods for preparing the pharmaceutical formulations of the present invention. In the pharmaceutical formulations, the HCV protease inhibitor will typically be administered in admixture with suitable carrier materials suitably selected with respect to the intended form of administration, i.e. oral tablets, capsules (either solid-filled, semi-solid filled or liquid filled), powders for constitution, oral gels, elixirs, dispersible granules, syrups, suspensions, and the like, and consistent with conventional pharmaceutical practices. For example, for oral administration in the form of tablets or capsules, the active drug component may be combined with any oral non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable inert carrier, such as lactose, starch, sucrose, cellulose, magnesium stearate, dicalcium phosphate, calcium sulfate, talc, mannitol, ethyl alcohol (liquid forms) and the like. Powders and tablets may be comprised of from about 5 to about 95 percent of the HCV protease inhibitor.

In one embodiment, the adjuvant is at least one pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant or at least one acidifying agent or both. When desired or needed, suitable carriers and other excipients (such as binders, glidents, lubricants, and disintegrants) may also be incorporated in the formulation. These adjuvants, carriers and excipients as well as others are described hereinafter.

Surfactant refers to an adjuvant material that reduces the contact angle of the active drug component and may also be referred to as a wetting agent. Typically, the present HCV protease inhibitors have relatively low solubilities in aqueous systems (as in a mammalian body), such as less than 1 mg/ml. For example, the solubility of a compound of Formula 1a in water is about 0.6 mg/ml. Treatment of diseases requiring high dosages of the present compounds, such as HCV, can be enhanced by improving the dissolution rate of the compounds thereby improving the extent and/or rate of absorption of the compounds in a mammal. The surfactant in the pharmaceutical formulations of the present invention enhances wetting of the present compounds and improves the dissolution rate of the compounds to render a greater quantity of the compounds available for absorption than is available in a formulation of the present compounds that does not include a surfactant. Any pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant that improves wetting of the present compounds may be used. Particularly suitable surfactants include sodium lauryl sulfate, stearic acid, monoethanolamine, docusate sodium, sorbitan fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters, ethoxylated aliphatic alcohols, propylene glycol monocaprylate, glycerol monostearate, medium chain triglycerides, polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, and polyoxyethylene stearates. In one embodiment, the surfactant is sodium lauryl sulfate. In another embodiment, the surfactant is a polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid ester. In yet another embodiment, the surfactant is PEG-1-PEG-9-lauryl glycol ether. These surfactants may be used alone in or combination in the pharmaceutical formulations of the present invention in a total amount of about 0.1 to about 10% by weight or about 1 to about 5% by weight.

Acidifying agent refers to an adjuvant material that lowers the pH of the formulation. The present compounds are known to generally be most stable at acidic pH. Any pharmaceutically acceptable acidifying agent that improves wetting of the present compounds may be used. Particularly suitable acidifying agents include tartaric acid, ascorbic acid, citric acid, malic acid and succinic acid. In one embodiment, the acidifying agent is tartaric acid. These acidifying agents may be used alone in or combination in the pharmaceutical formulations of the present invention in a total amount of about 0.1 to about 10% by weight or about 1 to 5% by weight.

Carrier refers to a substance that usually makes up the major portion of the composition or dosage formulation. Suitable carriers include celluloses such as microcrystalline cellulose; sugars such as lactose, sucrose, mannitol and sorbitol; and starches derived from wheat, corn, rice and potato. The amount of carrier in the formulation can range from about 10 to about 90% by weight of the total formulation, or about 25 to about 75% by weight, or about 30 to about 60% by weight, or about 12 to about 60% by weight. In one embodiment, the carrier is microcrystalline cellulose.

Binders refers to substances that bind or “glue” powders together and make them cohesive by forming granules, thus serving as the “adhesive” in the formulation. Binders add cohesive strength already available in the diluent or bulking agent. Suitable binders include sugars such as lactose, sucrose and corn sweeteners; starches derived from wheat, corn rice and potato; natural gums such as acacia, gelatin and tragacanth; derivatives of seaweed such as alginic acid, sodium alginate and ammonium calcium alginate; cellulosic materials such as methylcellulose and sodium carboxymethylcellulose and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose; polyvinylpyrrolidone; polyethylene glycol; waxes and inorganics such as magnesium aluminum silicate. The amount of binder in the formulation can range from about 10 to about 90% by weight of the total formulation, or about 25 to about 75% by weight, or about 30 to about 60% by weight, or about 12 to about 60% by weight. In one embodiment, the binder is anhydrous lactose.

Glidents refers to material that prevents caking and improves the flow characteristics of granulations, so that flow is smooth and uniform. Suitable glidents include silicon dioxide and talc. The amount of glident in the formulation can range from about 0.1% to about 5% by weight of the total formulation, or from about 0.5 to about 3% by weight.

Lubricants are substances added to the dosage formulation to enable the tablet, granules, etc. after it has been compressed, to release from the mold or die by reducing friction or wear. Suitable lubricants include metallic stearates such as magnesium stearate, calcium stearate or potassium stearate; stearic acid; high melting point waxes; and water soluble lubricants such as boric acid sodium chloride, sodium benzoate, sodium acetate, sodium chloride sodium oleate, polyethylene glycols and d′l-leucine. Lubricants are usually added at the very last step before compression, since they must be present on the surfaces of the granules and in between them and the parts of the tablet press. The amount of lubricant in the formulation can range from about 0.1 to about 10% by weight of the formulation, or from about 0.5 to about 5% by weight.

Disintegrant refers to materials added to the formulation to help it break apart (disintegrate) and release the drug. Suitable disintegrants include starches; “cold water soluble” modified starches such as sodium carboxymethyl starch; natural and synthetic gums such as locust bean, karaya, guar gum, tragacanth and agar; cellulose derivatives such as methylcellulose and sodium carboxymethylcellulose; microcrystalline celluloses and cross-linked microcrystalline celluloses such as sodium croscarmellose; alginates such as alginic acid and sodium alginate; clays such as bentonites; and effervescent mixtures.

Preferred superdisintegrants of the present invention expand to at least double their non-hydrated volume on contact with water. Exemplary of these superdisintegrants are cross-linked carboxymethyl cellulose sodium (a.k.a. croscarmellose sodium), sodium starch glycolate and cross-linked polyvinyl pyrollidone (a.k.a. crospovidone) and low substituted hydroxypropyl cellulose (L-HPC). Croscarmellose sodium is commercially available from FMC Corp. under the tradename Ac-Di-Sol® and from Avebe Corp. under the tradename Primellose®. Sodium starch glycolate is commercially available from Penwest Pharmaceuticals Co. under the tradename Explotab® and from Avebe Corp. under the tradename Primojel®. Crospovidone is commercially available from BASF Corp. under the tradename Kollidon® CL and from International Specialty Chemicals Corp. under the tradename Polyplasdone®. Low substituted hydroxypropyl cellulose (L-HPC) is available from Shin Etsu Chemical Company (LH-B1 and LH 21).

The amount of disintegrant in the composition can range from about 3 to about 50% by weight of the formulation, or from about 10 to about 35% by weight.

Coloring agents provide coloration to the formulation or the dosage formulation. Such excipients can include food grade dyes and food grade dyes adsorbed onto a suitable adsorbent such as clay or aluminum oxide. The amount of the coloring agent can vary from about 0.1 to about 5% by weight of the formulation, or from about 0.1 to about 1%.

Sweetening agents, flavoring agents, stabilizers, antioxidants and preservatives may also be included where appropriate.

The term pharmaceutical formulation encompasses both the bulk formulation and individual unit dosage formulations. The bulk composition is material that has not yet been formed into individual dosage units. An illustrative dosage unit is an oral dosage unit such as tablets, capsules and the like.

The formulations of the present invention may be administered orally or transdermally; oral administration is preferred. Preferably, the pharmaceutical formulation is in a unit dosage formulation. In such form, the preparation is subdivided into suitably sized unit doses containing appropriate quantities of the active components, e.g., an effective amount to achieve the desired purpose. Suitable unit dosage formulations are solids, gels, or fluids. Solid form preparations include powders, tablets, dispersible granules, capsules, cachets and suppositories.

The powders, tablets and capsules may be comprised of from about 5 to about 95 percent active ingredient. Tablets, powders, cachets and capsules can be used as solid dosage formulations suitable for oral administration. Other examples of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and methods of manufacture for various compositions may be found in A. Gennaro (ed.), Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18^th Edition, (1990), Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa.

Capsules are special containers or enclosures, often made of methyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohols, or denatured gelatins or starch for holding or containing the pharmaceutical formulation. Hard shell capsules are typically made of blends of relatively high gel strength bone and pork skin gelatins. The capsule itself may contain small amounts of dyes, opaquing agents, plasticizers and preservatives.

Tablet refers to a compressed or molded solid dosage formulation containing the pharmaceutical formulation. The tablet can be prepared by compression of mixtures or granulations obtained by wet granulation, dry granulation or by compaction.

A gel, such as an oral gel refers to the formulations dispersed or solubilized in a hydrophillic semi-solid matrix.

Suppositories containing the formulations of the present invention may be prepared by melting a low melting wax such as a mixture of fatty acid glycerides such as cocoa butter, and dispersing the components of the formulations homogeneously therein by stirring or similar mixing. The molten homogeneous mixture is then poured into convenient sized molds, allowed to cool and thereby solidify.

Additionally, the compositions of the present invention may be formulated in sustained release form to provide the rate controlled release of any one or more of the components or active ingredients to optimize the therapeutic effects, i.e., HCV inhibitory activity and the like. Suitable dosage formulations for sustained release include layered tablets containing layers of varying disintegration rates or controlled release polymeric matrices impregnated with the active components and shaped in tablet form or capsules containing such impregnated or encapsulated porous polymeric matrices.

Fluid forms may be liquids including solutions, suspensions and emulsions containing the formulations. Non-limiting examples include water or water-propylene glycol solutions for parenteral injections or addition of sweeteners and pacifiers for oral solutions, suspensions and emulsions. Liquid form preparations may also include solutions for intranasal administration.

Also included are aerosol preparations of the present invention that are suitable for inhalation. Aerosols may include solutions and solids in powder form, which may be in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier such as inert compressed gas, e.g., nitrogen.

Also included are solid form preparations which are intended to be converted, shortly before use, to liquid form preparations for either oral or parenteral administration. Such liquid forms include solutions, suspensions and emulsions. Alternatively, the formulations of the present invention may be prepared in powder blends that can be suspended in water or juices.

Transdermal formulations may take the form of creams, lotions, aerosols and/or emulsions and can be included in a transdermal patch of the matrix or reservoir type as are conventional in the art for this purpose.

Bioavailability refers to the rate and extent to which the active drug ingredient or therapeutic moiety is absorbed into the systemic circulation from an administered dosage formulation as compared to a standard or control.

Conventional methods for preparing tablets and capsules are known. Such methods include dry methods such as direct compression and compression of granulation produced by compaction, or wet methods or other special procedures. In one embodiment, a capsule containing the pharmaceutical formulation of the present invention is produced by blending the active drug component with some excipients, compacting the mixing such as with a roller compactor, milling the compact, blending the milled material with any remaining excipients and filling the final blend into capsules.

In one embodiment, the pharmaceutical formulation of the present is administered orally and is in a unit dosage formulation. In such form, the preparation is subdivided into suitably sized unit doses containing appropriate quantities of the active component, e.g., an effective amount to achieve the desired purpose.

The amount and frequency of administration of the formulations of the present invention will be regulated according to the judgment of the attending clinician considering such factors as age, condition and size of the patient as well as severity of the symptoms being treated. A typical recommended daily dosage regimen for oral administration can range from about 50 mg/day to about 4000 mg/day, in two to four divided doses.

The quantity of active compound in a unit dose of preparation may be varied or adjusted from about 1 mg to about 1000 mg, or from about 50 mg to about 800 mg, or from about 50 mg to about 600 mg, or from about 50 mg to about 400 mg, or from about 50 mg to about 200 mg according to the particular application. In one embodiment, the dosage formulation contains about 200 mg of the active compound.

The actual dosage employed may be varied depending upon the requirements of the patient and the severity of the condition being treated. Determination of the proper dosage regimen for a particular situation is within the skill of the art. For convenience, the total daily dosage may be divided and administered in portions during the day as required.

The amount of drug released over time by the controlled-release carrier is tested by any of the standardized USP Dissolution Tests in vitro. It is desirable to administer the dosage formulation twice a day and to have a relatively constant release of HCV protease inhibitor over a 12 hour period.

The following formulation exemplifies some of the dosage formulations of the present invention. In the formulation, the “Active Compound” designates any of the compounds of Formulae I-XXVIII, as defined above, or a pharmaceutically acceptable sale, solvate or ester thereof.

EXAMPLES

Example 1

	Ingredient	Amount
	Active Compound	200-500	mg
	Swellable Polymer	2-75%
	Microcrystalline cellulose	0-60	wt. %
	Lactose	0-60	wt. %
	Sodium lauryl sulfate	0-10	wt. %
	Tartaric acid	0-10	wt. %
	Silicon dioxide	0-3	wt. %
	Magnesium stearate	1-10	wt. %
	TOTAL WEIGHT	300-1000	mg

The powdery Active Compound is blended with some of the ingredients and compacted with a roller compactor to densify the powder. The resulting compact is milled, blended with the remaining ingredients and filled into a capsule or tablet.

Examples 2-7 exemplify formulations with non-pH sensitive polymers in an expandable matrix.

Example 2

Ingredients:                     % w/w
Kollidon SR                      7-25%
Crosspovidone                    10-30%
Polyox-poly(ethylene oxide) WSR N-60K/WSR 6-25%
301/WSRCoagulant
Mg Stearate                      1%
Active compound                  30-66%

Example 3

Ingredients:                     % w/w
Kollidon SR                      7-25%
Crosspovidone                    10-30%
Natrosol Hydroxyethylcellulose 250HX Pharm, 6-25%
250HHX Pharm
Mg Stearate                      1%
Active compound                  30-66%

Example 4

Ingredients:                     % w/w
Kollidon SR                      7-25%
Crosspovidone                    10-30%
Sodium Carboxymethyl cellulose 9M31F PH/12M31 P 6-25%
Mg Stearate                      1%
Active compound                  30-66%

Example 5

Ingredients:                     % w/w
Kollidon SR                      7-25%
L-HPC                            10-30%
Polyox-poly(ethylene oxide) WSR N-60K/WSR 6-25%
301/WSRCoagulant
Mg Stearate                      1%
Active compound                  30-66%

Example 6

Ingredients:                     % w/w
Kollidon SR                      7-25%
L-HPC                            10-30%
Natrosol Hydroxy ethyl cellulose 250HX Pharm, 6-25%
250HHX Pharm
Mg Stearate                      1%
Active compound                  30-66%

Example 7

Ingredients:                     % w/w
Kollidon SR                      7-25%
L-HPC                            10-30%
Aqualon Sodium Carboxymethyl cellulose 9M31F 6-25%
PH/12M31 P
Mg Stearate                      1%
Active compound                  30-66%

In brief, the aforementioned tablets were prepared as follows. Each of the ingredients was measured to an accuracy of 0.02 g into a 500 cc amber glass bottle. The bottle was subjected to tumble mixing for 10 min using a Turbula Shaker-Mixer (vendor: Glen Mills Inc). The blend (in small portions) was passed thrice through a 20 mesh sieve (U.S. Standard Testing Sieve, ATM, No. L3-30) with a spatula and the entire blend that passed the screen pooled. The final blend was pressed into a capsule-shape tablet using a Carver press. Specifically, 800-900 mg of the final blend was pressed using two lower punches: size 0.750×0.328 capsule shape (see vendor and specification attached); die size 0.750×0.3281 capsule shape (see vendor and specification attached); at a pressure setting of 1000 psi.

A wet-granulation process may be used for making granules with part of the components in above formula. The resultant granules can then be combined with the rest of components in the formula through appropriate mixing, and then pressed into tablets using a standard tablet press.

The resulting tablets may be collected and stored in amber glass bottles and stored at either room temperature, or in a refrigerator (4° C.) until use or shipping.

In one preferred embodiment, the active compound is Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof, or a mixture of two or more thereof.

In another preferred embodiment, the active compound is Formula XXVII, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof, or a mixture of two or more thereof.

The following are select embodiments of the controlled-release dosage formulation:

Ingredients:                     % w/w
Kollidon SR                      about 7 to about 25%
Crosspovidone                    about 15 to about 35%
Polyox-poly(ethylene oxide) WSR N-60K/WSR about 6 to about 35%
301/WSRCoagulant
Mg Stearate                      about 1%
At least one compound of Formula I to about 30 to about 66%
XXVIII
Kollidon SR                      about 7 to about 25%
Crosspovidone                    about 15 to about 35%
Natrosol Hydroxyethylcellulose 250HX about 6 to about 35%
Pharm, 250HHX Pharm
Mg Stearate                      about 1%
At least one compound of Formula I to about 30 to about 66%
XXVIII
Kollidon SR                      about 7 to about 25%
Crosspovidone                    about 15 to about 35%
Sodium Carboxymethyl cellulose 9M31F about 6 to about 35%
PH/12M31 P
Mg Stearate                      about 1%
At least one compound of Formula I to about 30 to about 66%
XXVIII
Kollidon SR                      about 7 to about 25%
L-HPC                            about 10 to about 30%
Polyox-poly(ethylene oxide) WSR N-60K/WSR about 6 to about 35%
301/WSRCoagulant
Mg Stearate                      about 1%
At least one compound of Formula I to about 30 to about 66%
XXVIII
Kollidon SR                      about 7 to about 25%
L-HPC                            about 10 to about 30%
Natrosol Hydroxy ethyl cellulose 250HX about 6 to about 25%
Pharm, 250HHX Pharm
Mg Stearate                      about 1%
At least one compound of Formula I to about 30 to about 66%
XXVIII
Kollidon SR                      about 7 to about 25%
L-HPC                            about 10 to about 30%
Aqualon Sodium Carboxymethyl cellulose about 6 to about 35%
9M31F PH/12M31 P
Mg Stearate                      about 1%
At least one compound of Formula I to about 30 to about 66%
XXVIII

The Following Experimental Section Applies for the Preparation of the Compounds of Formula XI:

Abbreviations which are used in the descriptions of the schemes, preparations and the examples that follow are:

• THF: Tetrahydrofuran
• DMF: N,N-Dimethylformamide
• EtOAc: Ethyl acetate
• AcOH: Acetic acid
• HOOBt: 3-Hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazin-4(3H)-one
• EDCl: 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride
• NMM: N-Methylmorpholine

ADDP: 1,1′-(Azodicarbobyl)dipiperidine

• DEAD: Diethylazodicarboxylate
• MeOH: Methanol
• EtOH: Ethanol
• Et₂O: Diethyl ether
• DMSO: Dimethylsulfoxide
• HOBt: N-Hydroxybenzotriazole
• PyBrOP: Bromo-tris-pyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate
• DCM: Dichloromethane
• DCC: 1,3-Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
• TEMPO: 2,2,6,6-Tetramethyl-1-piperidinyloxy
• Phg: Phenylglycine
• Chg: Cyclohexylglycine
• Bn: Benzyl
• Bzl: Benzyl
• Et: Ethyl
• Ph: Phenyl
• iBoc: isobutoxycarbonyl
• iPr: isopropyl
• ^tBu or Bu^t: tert-Butyl
• Boc: tert-Butyloxycarbonyl
• Cbz: Benzyloxycarbonyl
• Cp: Cylcopentyldienyl
• Ts: p-toluenesulfonyl
• MCPBA: 3-chloroperbenzoic acid.
• Me: Methyl
• HATU: O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate
• DMAP: 4-N,N-Dimethylaminopyridine
• Bop: Benzotriazol-1-yl-oxy-tris(dimethylamino)hexafluorophosphate
• PCC: Pyridiniumchlorochromate

Other abbreviations are commonly used abbreviations Such as according to the guidelines published by Journal of Organic Chemistry.

General Schemes for Preparation of Target Compounds

Compounds of the present invention were synthesized using the general schemes (Methods A-E) described below.

Method A

Deprotection of the N-Boc functionality of 1.01 under acidic conditions provided the hydrochloride salt 1.02 which was subsequently coupled with N-Boc-tert-leucine under peptide coupling methodology (Louis A Carpino et al. “Preparation of uronium and immonium salts for peptide coupling”, WO 2002094822, pp. 76) to afford 1.03. N-Boc deprotection followed by treatment with appropriate isocyanate gave the urea 1.05. Hydrolysis of the methyl ester provided the acid 1.06. Peptide coupling of the acid 1.06 with the appropriate P₁-P′ primary amide moiety afforded the hydroxyl amide 1.07. Oxidation (Moffatt, or Dess-Martin's) resulted in the target compound 1.08. Method B

Peptide coupling of the acid 1.06 with the appropriate P₁-P′ secondary amide moiety afforded the hydroxyl amide 1.09. Oxidation (Moffatt or Dess-Martin's) resulted in the target compound 1.10.

Method C

In another variation, peptide coupling of the N-Boc-P2-P₃-acid 1.03 with the appropriate P₁-P′ amide moiety afforded the hydroxylamide 1.11. Oxidation (Moffatt or Dess-Martin's) resulted in the keto-amide 1.12. Deprotection of the N-Boc using either formic acid or 4 M HCl in dioxane gave the formate or hydrochloride salt 1.13. Treatment with a suitable isocyanate (or isocyanate equivalent) resulted in the target compound 1.14. Method D

In yet another variation, the hydrochloride salt 1.13 was converted to the 4-nitrophenyl carbamate 1.15 by reaction with 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate. Subsequent treatment with an amine (or amine hydrochloride salt) of choice provided the target compound 1.14. Method E

In yet another variation, the dipeptide hydrochloride salt 1.04 was converted to the 4-nitrophenyl carbamate as described above. Treatment with an amine (or amine hydrochloride salt) of choice provided the urea derivative 1.05. Hydrolysis and further elaboration as described in Methods A/B provided the target compounds 1.14. The Following Experimental Section Applies for the Preparation of the Compounds of Formula XII:

Abbreviations which are used in the descriptions of the schemes, preparations and the examples that follow are:

• THF: Tetrahydrofuran
• DMF: N,N-Dimethylformamide
• EtOAc: Ethyl acetate
• AcOH: Acetic acid
• HOOBt: 3-Hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazin-4(3H)-one
• EDCl: 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride
• NMM: N-Methylmorpholine
• ADDP: 1,1′-(Azodicarbobyl)dipiperidine
• DEAD: Diethylazodicarboxylate
• MeOH: Methanol
• EtOH: Ethanol
• Et₂O: Diethyl ether
• DMSO: Dimethylsulfoxide
• HOBt: N-Hydroxybenzotriazole
• PyBrOP: Bromo-tris-pyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate
• DCM: Dichloromethane
• DCC: 1,3-Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
• TEMPO: 2,2,6,6-Tetramethyl-1-piperidinyloxy
• Phg: Phenylglycine
• Chg: Cyclohexylglycine
• Bn: Benzyl
• Bzl: Benzyl
• Et: Ethyl
• Ph: Phenyl
• iBoc: isobutoxycarbonyl
• iPr: isopropyl
• ^tBu or Bu^t: tert-Butyl
• Boc: tert-Butyloxycarbonyl
• Cbz: Benzyloxycarbonyl
• Cp: Cylcopentyldienyl
• Ts: p-toluenesulfonyl
• Me: Methyl
• HATU: O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate
• DMAP: 4-N,N-Dimethylaminopyridine
• BOP: Benzotriazol-1-yl-oxy-tris(dimethylamino)hexafluorophosphate
• PCC: Pyridiniumchlorochromate

General Schemes for Preparation of Target Compounds

Compounds of the present invention were synthesized using the general schemes (Methods A-E) described below.

Method A:

Deprotection of the N-Boc functionality of 1.01 under acidic conditions provided the hydrochloride salt 1.02 which was subsequently coupled with N-Boc-tert-leucine under peptide coupling methodology to afford 1.03. N-Boc deprotection followed by treatment with appropriate isocyanate gave the urea 1.05. Hydrolysis of the methyl ester provided the acid 1.06. Peptide coupling of the acid 1.06 with the appropriate P₁-P′ primary amide moiety afforded the hydroxylamide 1.07. Oxidation (Moffatt or related process—T. T. Tidwell, Synthesis, 1990, 857; or Dess-Martin's—J. Org. Chem., 1983, 48, 4155) resulted in the target compound 1.08. Method B

Peptide coupling of the acid 1.06 with the appropriate P₁-P′ secondary amide moiety afforded the hydroxylamide 1.09. Oxidation (Moffatt or Dess-Martin's) resulted in the target compound 1.10. Method C

In another variation, peptide coupling of the N-Boc-P₂-P₃-acid 1.17 with the appropriate P₁-P′ amide moiety afforded the hydroxylamide 1.11. Oxidation (Moffatt or Dess-Martin's) resulted in the keto amide 1.12. Deprotection of the N-Boc functionality gave the hydrochloride salt 1.13. Treatment with a suitable isocyanate (or isocyanate equivalent) resulted in the target compound 1.14. Method D

In yet another variation, the hydrochloride salt 1.13 was converted to the 4-nitrophenyl carbamate 1.15 by reaction with 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate. Subsequent treatment with an amine (or amine hydrochloride salt) of choice provided the target compound 1.14. Method E

In yet another variation, the dipeptide hydrochloride salt 1.03 was converted to the 4-nitrophenyl carbamate as described above. Treatment with an amine (or amine hydrochloride salt) of choice provided the urea derivative 1.05. Hydrolysis and further elaboration as described in Methods A/B provided the target compounds 1.14.

The following experimental section applies for the preparation of the compounds of Formula XIII:

Abbreviations which are used in the descriptions of the schemes, preparations and the examples that follow are:

• THF: Tetrahydrofuran
• DMF: N,N-Dimethylformamide
• EtOAc: Ethyl acetate
• AcOH: Acetic acid
• HOOBt: 3-Hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazin-4(3H)-one
• EDCl: 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride
• NMM: N-Methylmorpholine
• ADDP: 1,1′-(Azodicarbobyl)dipiperidine
• DEAD: Diethylazodicarboxylate
• DIAD: Diisopropylazodicarboxylate
• MeOH: Methanol
• EtOH: Ethanol
• Et₂O: Diethyl ether
• DMSO: Dimethylsulfoxide
• HOBt: N-Hydroxybenzotriazole
• PyBrOP: Bromo-tris-pyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate
• DCM: Dichloromethane
• DCC: 1,3-Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
• TEMPO: 2,2,6,6-Tetramethyl-1-piperidinyloxy
• Phg: Phenylglycine
• Chg: Cyclohexylglycine
• Bn: Benzyl
• Bz: Benzyl
• Et: Ethyl
• Ph: Phenyl
• iBoc: isobutoxycarbonyl
• iPr: isopropyl
• ^tBu or Bu^t: tert-Butyl
• Boc: tert-Butyloxycarbonyl
• Cbz: Benzyloxycarbonyl
• Cp: Cylcopentyldienyl
• Ts: p-toluenesulfonyl
• Me: Methyl
• Ms or Mesyl: Methane sulfonyl
• HATU: O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate
• DMAP: 4-N,N-Dimethylaminopyridine
• Bop: Benzotriazol-1-yl-oxy-tris(dimethylamino)hexafluorophosphate
• PCC: Pyridiniumchlorochromate
• DIBAL-H: diisopropyl aluminum hydride
• rt or RT: Room temperature
• quant.: Quantitative yield
• h or hr: hour
• min: minute
• TFA: Trifluoroacetic acid

General Schemes for Preparation of Target Compounds

Compounds of the present invention were synthesized using the general schemes (Methods A-E) described below.

Method A

Deprotection of the N-Boc functionality of 1.01 under acidic conditions provided the hydrochloride salt 1.02 which was subsequently coupled with N-Boc-tert-leucine under peptide coupling methodology to afford 1.03. N-Boc deprotection followed by treatment with appropriate isocyanate gave the urea 1.05. Hydrolysis of the methyl ester provided the acid 1.06. Peptide coupling of the acid 1.06 with the appropriate P₁-P′ primary amide moiety afforded the hydroxylamide 1.07. Oxidation (Moffatt or related process—T. T. Tidwell, Synthesis, 1990, 857; or Dess-Martin's periodinane (J. Org. Chem., 1983, 48, 4155) resulted in the target compound 1.08. Method B

Peptide coupling of the acid 1.06 with the appropriate P₁-P′ secondary amide moiety afforded the hydroxylamide 1.09. Oxidation (Moffatt or Dess-Martin's) resulted in the target compound 1.10. Method C

In another variation, peptide coupling of the N-Boc-P₂-P₃-acid 1.17 with the appropriate P₁-P′ amide moiety afforded the hydroxylamide 1.11. Oxidation (Moffatt or Dess-Martin's) resulted in the keto amide 1.12. Deprotection of the N-Boc functionality gave the hydrochloride salt 1.13. Treatment with a suitable isocyanate (or isocyanate equivalent) resulted in the target compound 1.14. Method D

In yet another variation, the hydrochloride salt 1.13 was converted to the 4-nitrophenyl carbamate 1.15 by reaction with 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate. Subsequent treatment with an amine (or amine hydrochloride salt) of choice provided the target compound 1.14. Method E

In yet another variation, the dipeptide hydrochloride salt 1.03 was converted to the 4-nitrophenyl carbamate as described above. Treatment with an amine (or amine hydrochloride salt) of choice provided the urea derivative 1.05. Hydrolysis and further elaboration as described in Methods A/B provided the target compounds 1.14. The Following Experimental Section Applies for the Preparation of the Compounds of Formula XIV:

For the procedures described below, the following abbreviations are used:

• THF: Tetrahydrofuran
• DMF: N,N-Dimethylformamide
• EtOAc: Ethyl acetate
• AcOH: Acetic acid
• HOOBt: 3-Hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazin-4(3H)-one
• EDCl: 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride
• NMM: N-Methylmorpholine
• ADDP: 1,1′-(Azodicarbobyl)dipiperidine
• DEAD: Diethylazodicarboxylate
• MeOH: Methanol
• EtOH: Ethanol
• Et2O: Diethyl ether
• DMSO: Dimethylsulfoxide
• HOBt: N-Hydroxybenzotriazole
• PyBrOP: Bromo-tris-pyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate
• DCM: Dichloromethane
• DCC: 1,3-Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
• TEMPO: 2,2,6,6-Tetramethyl-1-piperidinyloxy
• Phg: Phenylglycine
• Chg: Cyclohexylglycine
• Bn: Benzyl
• Bzl: Benzyl
• Et: Ethyl
• Ph: Phenyl
• DMF-DMA: N,N-Dimethylformamide-dimethylacetal
• iBoc: isobutoxycarbonyl
• iPr: isopropyl
• ^tBu or Bu^t: tert-Butyl
• Boc: tert-Butyloxycarbonyl
• Cbz: Benzyloxycarbonyl
• Cp: Cylcopentyldienyl
• Ts: p-toluenesulfonyl
• Me: Methyl
• HATU: O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate
• DMAP: 4-N,N-Dimethylaminopyridine
• BOP: Benzotriazol-1-yl-oxy-tris(dimethylamino)hexafluorophosphate
• PCC: Pyridiniumchlorochromate
• KHMDS: Potassium Hexamethyldisilazide or Potassium bis(trimethylsilylamide)
• NaHMDS: Sodium Hexamethyldisilazide or Sodium bis(trimethylsilylamide)
• LiHMDS: Lithium Hexamethyldisilazide or Lithium bis(trimethylsilylamide)
• 10% Pd/C: 10% Palladium on carbon (by weight).
• TG: Thioglycerol

General Schemes for Preparation of Target Compounds

Compounds of the present invention were synthesized using the general schemes (Methods A-E) described below.

Method A

Deprotection of the N-Boc functionality of 1.01 under acidic conditions provided the hydrochloride salt 1.02 which was subsequently coupled with N-Boc-tert-leucine under peptide coupling methodology to afford 1.03. N-Boc deprotection followed by treatment with appropriate isocyanate gave the urea 1.05. Hydrolysis of the methyl ester provided the acid 1.06. Peptide coupling of the acid 1.06 with the appropriate P₁-P′ primary amide moiety afforded the hydroxylamide 1.07. Oxidation (Moffatt oxidation or related process—see, T. T. Tidwell, Synthesis, 1990, 857), or Dess-Martin Periodinane—J. Org. Chem., (1983) 48, 4155) resulted in the target compound 1.08. Method B

Peptide coupling of the acid 1.06 with the appropriate P₁-P′ secondary amide moiety afforded the hydroxylamide 1.09. Oxidation (Moffatt or Dess-Martin's) resulted in the target compound 1.10. Method C

In another variation, peptide coupling of the N-Boc-P2-P₃-acid 1.17 with the appropriate P₁-P′ amide moiety afforded the hydroxylamide 1.11. Oxidation (Moffatt or Dess-Martin Periodinane) resulted in the keto amide 1.12. Deprotection of the N-Boc functionality gave the hydrochloride salt 1.13. Treatment with a suitable isocyanate (or isocyanate equivalent) resulted in the target compound 1.14. Method D

In yet another variation, the hydrochloride salt 1.13 was converted to the 4-nitrophenyl carbamate 1.15 by reaction with 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate. Subsequent treatment with an amine (or amine hydrochloride salt) of choice provided the target compound 1.14. Method E

In yet another variation, the dipeptide hydrochloride salt 1.03 was converted to the 4-nitrophenyl carbamate as described above. Treatment with an amine (or amine hydrochloride salt) of choice provided the urea derivative 1.05. Hydrolysis and further elaboration as described in Methods A/B provided the target compounds 1.14. The Following Experimental Section Applies for the Preparation of the Compounds of Formula XV:

For the procedures described below, the following abbreviations are used:

• THF: Tetrahydrofuran
• DMF: N,N-Dimethylformamide
• EtOAc: Ethyl acetate
• AcOH: Acetic acid
• HOOBt: 3-Hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazin-4(3H)-one
• EDCl: 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride
• NMM: N-Methylmorpholine
• ADDP: 1,1′-(Azodicarbobyl)dipiperidine
• DEAD: Diethylazodicarboxylate
• MeOH: Methanol
• EtOH: Ethanol
• Et2O: Diethyl ether
• DMSO: Dimethylsulfoxide
• HOBt: N-Hydroxybenzotriazole
• PyBrOP: Bromo-tris-pyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate
• DCM: Dichloromethane
• DCC: 1,3-Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
• TEMPO: 2,2,6,6-Tetramethyl-1-piperidinyloxy
• Phg: Phenylglycine
• Chg: Cyclohexylglycine
• Bn: Benzyl
• Bzl: Benzyl
• Et: Ethyl
• Ph: Phenyl
• iBoc: isobutoxycarbonyl
• iPr: isopropyl
• ^tBu or Bu^t: tert-Butyl
• Boc: tert-Butyloxycarbonyl
• Cbz: Benzyloxycarbonyl
• Cp: Cylcopentyldienyl
• Ts: p-toluenesulfonyl
• Me: Methyl
• HATU: O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate
• DMAP: 4-N,N-Dimethylaminopyridine
• BOP: Benzotriazol-1-yl-oxy-tris(dimethylamino)hexafluorophosphate
• PCC: Pyridiniumchlorochromate
• KHMDS: Potassium Hexamethyldisilazide or Potassium bis(trimethylsilylamide)
• NaHMDS: Sodium Hexamethyldisilazide or Sodium bis(trimethylsilylamide)
• LiHMDS: Lithium Hexamethyldisilazide or Lithium bis(trimethylsilylamide)
• 10% Pd/C: 10% Palladium on carbon (by weight).

Preparative Example 1

Step A

A solution of pyrazinecarboxylic acid 1a (3 g) in 150 mL of dry dichloromethane and 150 mL of dry DMF was stirred at 0° C. and treated with HATU (1.4 eq, 6.03 g). L-cyclohexylglycine hydrochloride 1b (1.2 eq, 6.03 g) was added in small portions. Then, N-methylmorpholine (4 eq, 10 mL, d 0.920) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was gradually warmed to room temperature and stirred for 20 h. All the volatiles were removed under vacuum and the residue was dissolved in 500 mL of ethyl acetate. The organic layer washed with water (100 mL), aqueous 1N HCl (100 mL), aqueous saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (100 mL), and brine (100 mL). The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was chromatographed on silica gel (gradient: acetone/hexanes; 5:95 to 3:7) to afford the product 1c as a white solid. Step B

A solution of methyl ester 1c (6.5 g) in 270 mL of a 1:1:1 mixture of THF/MeOH/water was cooled to 0° C. and treated with lithium hydroxide monohydrate (2.5 eq, 2.45 g). The mixture was stirred and monitored by TLC (acetone/hexanes; 2:8). When all the starting material had been consumed, the reaction mixture was treated with 100 mL of aqueous 1N HCl and the mixture was concentrated on the rotavap. Dichloromethane (250 mL) was added and layers separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane (3×80 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated to afford the product 1d as a white solid. Step C

The amino ester 1e was prepared following the method of R. Zhang and J. S. Madalengoitia (J. Org. Chem. 1999, 64, 330), with the exception that the Boc group was cleaved by the reaction of the Boc-protected amino acid with methanolic HCl (4M HCl in dioxane was also employed for the deprotection).

(Note: In a variation of the reported synthesis, the sulfonium ylide was replaced with the corresponding phosphonium ylide).

Step D

A solution of Boc-tert-Leu 1f (Fluka, 5.0 g, 21.6 mmol) in dry CH₂Cl₂/DMF (50 mL, 1:1) was cooled to 0° C. and treated with the amine hydrochloride 1e (5.3 g, 25.7 mmol), NMM (6.5 g, 64.8 mmol) and BOP reagent (11.6 g, 25.7 mmol). The reaction was stirred at rt. for 24 h, diluted with aqueous HCl (1 M) and extracted with CH₂Cl₂. The combined organic layers were washed with aqueous 1M HCl, saturated NaHCO₃, brine, dried (MgSO₄), filtered and concentrated in vacuo and purified by chromatography (SiO₂, Acetone/Hexane 1:5) to yield 1g as a colorless solid. Step E

A solution of methyl ester 1g (4.0 g, 10.46 mmol) was dissolved in 4M HCl in dioxane and stirred at rt. for 3 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to obtain the amine hydrochloride salt, 1h which was used without purification. Step F

A solution of acid 1d (100 mg) in 5 mL of dry dichloromethane and 5 mL of dry DMF was stirred at 0° C. and treated with HATU (1.4 eq, 202 mg). The amine hydrochloride 1h (1.2 eq, 146 mg) was added. Then, N-methylmorpholine (4 eq, 0.17 mL, d 0.920) was also added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. overnight. All the volatiles were removed under vacuum and the residue was dissolved in 80 mL of ethyl acetate. The organic layer washed with water (10 mL), aqueous 1N HCl (10 mL), aqueous saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (10 mL), and brine (10 mL). The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was chromatographed on silica gel (gradient: acetone/hexanes; 1:9 to 4:6) to afford the product 1i as a white solid.

A solution of methyl ester 1i (180 mg) in 9 mL of a 1:1:1 mixture of THF/MeOH/water was cooled to 0° C. and treated with lithium hydroxide monohydrate (2.5 eq, 35 mg). The mixture was stirred and monitored by TLC (acetone/hexanes; 3:7). When all the starting material had been consumed, the reaction mixture was treated with 50 mL of aqueous 1N HCl and the mixture was concentrated on the rotavap. Dichloromethane (80 mL) was added and layers separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane (3×50 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated to afford the product 1j as a white solid. Step H

A solution of acid 1k (2 g) in 100 mL of dry dichloromethane and 5 mL of DMF was treated with N,O-dimethylhydroxylamine hydrochloride (1.1 eq, 986 mg), BOP reagent (1.1 eq, 4.47 g), and N-methylmorpholine (3.3 eq, 3.3 mL, d 0.920) in that order. The mixture was heated to 50° C. overnight. The reaction mixture was concentrated to half its volume and diluted with 400 mL of ethyl acetate. The organic layer washed with water (80 mL), aqueous 1M HCl (80 mL), aqueous saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (80 mL), and brine (80 mL). The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was chromatographed on silica gel (gradient: acetone/hexanes; 5:95 to 3:7) to afford the product 1l as a clear oil. Step I

A solution of amide 1l (2.2 g) in 100 mL of dry THF was cooled to ° C. Lithium aluminum hydride solution (1.3 eq) was added dropwise. The cooling bath was removed after 5 min and the mixture was allowed to reach room temperature. TLC analysis (ethyl acetate/hexanes; 2:8) showed that all the starting material had been consumed. The excess LAH was carefully quenched by addition of drops of aqueous saturated sodium hydrogen sulfate. The mixture was diluted with 200 mL of ether and aqueous saturated sodium hydrogen sulfate was added in small portions until a white solid precipitated. The mixture was filtered thru celite and the filtrate was washed with 50 mL of brine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The residue was chromatographed on silica gel (gradient: ethyl acetate/hexanes; 5:95 to 4:6) to afford the aldehyde product 1m as a colorless oil. Step J

A solution of aldehyde 1m (1.8 g) in 100 mL of dry dichloromethane was treated with isonitrile (1.1 eq, 680 mg) and acetic acid (2 eq, 1.02 mL, d 1.0149).

The mixture was stirred overnight. All the volatiles were removed under vacuum and the residue was chromatographed on silica gel (gradient: ethyl acetate/hexanes; 2:8 to 6:4) to afford the product 1n as a white solid. Step K

A solution of acetate 1n (1.6 g) in 60 mL of a 1:1:1 mixture of THF/MeOH/water was treated with lithium hydroxide monohydrate and stirred for approximately 1 h until all the starting material had been consumed as determined by TLC analysis (ethyl acetate/hexanes; 1:1). The volatiles were removed in rotavap and the residue was diluted with dichloromethane (150 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was diluted with 30 mL of aqueous saturated sodium bicarbonate solution and extracted with dichloromethane (3×80 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to afford the product 1p as a white solid. Step L

The N-Boc protected amine 1p (1.5 g) was dissolved in 20 mL of 4M HCl in dioxane. The reaction mixture was stirred for about 1 h until all the starting material had been consumed. All the volatiles were removed under vacuum to afford the product 1q as a white solid. Step M

A solution of acid 1j (50 mg) in 2 mL of dry dichloromethane and 2 mL of dry DMF was stirred at 0° C. and treated with HATU (1.4 eq, 52 mg). The amine hydrochloride 1q (1.2 eq, 26 mg) was added. Then, N-methylmorpholine (4 eq, 0.042 mL, d 0.920) was also added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. overnight. All the volatiles were removed under vacuum and the residue was dissolved in 80 mL of ethyl acetate. The organic layer washed with water (10 mL), aqueous 1N HCl (10 mL), aqueous saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (10 mL), and brine (10 mL). The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The product I r was used without further purification. Step N

A solution of alcohol 1r (65 mg) in 5 mL of dry dichloromethane was treated with Dess-Martin periodinane (3 eq, 121 mg). Reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 45 min. The mixture was treated with aqueous 1M sodium thiosulfate solution (10 mL) and aqueous saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (10 mL) and stirred for 15 min. The mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (3×20 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was chromatographed on silica gel (gradient: acetone/hexanes; 2:8 to 5:5) to afford the product 1 as a white solid.

One skilled in the art would understand that other suitable compounds of Formula XV can be prepared in a similar manner to that disclosed above.

The Following Experimental Section Applies for the Preparation of the Compounds of Formula XVI:

Preparative Example A

A solution of acid 1 (255 mg) in 5 mL of dry dichloromethane and 5 mL of dry DMF was stirred at 0° C. and treated with HATU (368 mg). The amine hydrochloride 2 (201 mg) was added followed by addition of N-methylmorpholine (0.42 mL). The reaction mixture was gradually warmed to room temperature and stirred overnight. All the volatiles were removed under vacuum and the residue was taken into 100 mL of ethyl acetate. The organic layer washed with aqueous 1N HCl (15 mL), aqueous saturated NaHCO3 (15 mL), water (15 mL), brine (15 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the desired product A1. No further purification was carried out for the product. Step 2

A solution of A1 (360 mg) in 20 mL of a 1:1 mixture of toluene/DMSO was treated with EDCl (1.3 g) and dichloroacetic acid (0.42 mL, d 1.563). Reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for about 3 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with dichloromethane (100 mL) and washed with aqueous saturated NaHCO₃ (15 mL), aqueous 1N HCl (15 mL), and brine (15 mL). The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtrated, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was chromatographed on silica gel (gradient: acetone/hexanes; 2:8 to 5:5) to afford the product A2 in 84% yield. Step 3

The N-Boc protected amine A2 was treated with 10 mL of formic acid. The resulting solution was stirred for 2 h. All the volatiles were removed under reduced pressure. No further purification was done for the product A3. Step 4

To a solution of the amine salt A3 in 1 mL of dry methylene chloride was added N-methylmorpholine (0.037 mL, d 0.920). The resulting solution was cooled in an ice-water bath and a solution of isocyanate in toluene (2.5 mL of a 0.135M soln) was slowly added. The mixture was stirred for 2 h (temp 0 to 25° C.). The reaction mixture was diluted with 60 mL of dichloromethane and washed with 15 mL of aqueous 1N HCl. Aqueous layer was back extracted with dichloromethane (2×20 mL). Combined organic layers were dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was chromatographed on Silica gel (gradient: acetone/hexanes; 1:9 to 6:4) to give the product A (15 mg) as a white solid in 20% yield. HRMS (FAB) calcd for C₃₇H₅₃N₆O₇ [M+H] 693.3976; found 693.3987.

One skilled in the art would understand that other suitable compounds of Formula XVI can be prepared in a similar manner to that disclosed above.

The Following Experimental Section Applies for the Preparation of the Compounds of Formula XVII:

Abbreviations which are used in the descriptions of the schemes, preparations and the examples that follow are:

• THF: Tetrahydrofuran
• DMF: N,N-Dimethylformamide
• EtOAc: Ethyl acetate
• AcOH: Acetic acid
• HOOBt: 3-Hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazin-4(3H)-one
• EDCl: 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride
• NMM: N-Methylmorpholine
• ADDP: 1,1′-(Azodicarbobyl)dipiperidine
• DEAD: Diethylazodicarboxylate
• MeOH: Methanol
• EtOH: Ethanol
• Et2O: Diethyl ether
• DMSO: Dimethylsulfoxide
• HOBt: N-Hydroxybenzotriazole
• PyBrOP: Bromo-tris-pyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate
• DCM: Dichloromethane
• DCC: 1,3-Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
• TEMPO: 2,2,6,6-Tetramethyl-1-piperidinyloxy
• Phg: Phenylglycine
• Chg: Cyclohexylglycine
• Bn: Benzyl
• Bzl: Benzyl
• Et: Ethyl
• Ph: Phenyl
• iBoc: isobutoxycarbonyl
• iPr: isopropyl
• ^tBu or Bu^t: tert-Butyl
• Boc: tert-Butyloxycarbonyl
• Cbz: Benzyloxycarbonyl
• Cp: Cylcopentyldienyl
• Ts: p-toluenesulfonyl
• Me: Methyl
• HATU: O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate
• DMAP: 4-N,N-Dimethylaminopyridine
• BOP: Benzotriazol-1-yl-oxy-tris(dimethylamino)hexafluorophosphate
• PCC: Pyridiniumchlorochromate
• KHMDS: Potassium Hexamethyldisilazide or Potassium bis(trimethylsilylamide)
• NaHMDS: Sodium Hexamethyldisilazide or Sodium bis(trimethylsilylamide)
• LiHMDS: Lithium Hexamethyldisilazide or Lithium bis(trimethylsilylamide)
• 10% Pd/C: 10% Palladium on carbon (by weight).
• TG: Thioglycerol

General Schemes for Preparation of Target Compounds

Compounds of the present invention were synthesized using the general schemes (Methods A-E) described below.

Method A

Deprotection of the N-Boc functionality of 1.01 under acidic conditions provided the hydrochloride salt 1.02 which was subsequently coupled with N-Boc-tert-leucine under peptide coupling methodology to afford 1.03. N-Boc deprotection followed by treatment with appropriate isocyanate gave the urea 1.05. Hydrolysis of the methyl ester provided the acid 1.06. Peptide coupling of the acid 1.06 with the appropriate P₁-P′ primary amide moiety afforded the hydroxylamide 1.07. Oxidation (Moffatt oxidation or related process—see, T. T. Tidwell, Synthesis, 1990, 857), or Dess-Martin Periodinane—J. Org. Chem., (1983) 48, 4155) resulted in the target compound 1.08. Method B

Peptide coupling of the acid 1.06 with the appropriate P₁-P′ secondary amide moiety afforded the hydroxylamide 1.09. Oxidation (Moffatt or Dess-Martin's) resulted in the target compound 1.10. Method C

In another variation, peptide coupling of the N-Boc-P2-P₃-acid 1.17 with the appropriate P₁-P′ amide moiety afforded the hydroxylamide 1.11. Oxidation (Moffatt or Dess-Martin Periodinane) resulted in the keto amide 1.12. Deprotection of the N-Boc functionality gave the hydrochloride salt 1.13. Treatment with a suitable isocyanate (or isocyanate equivalent) resulted in the target compound 1.14. Method D

In yet another variation, the hydrochloride salt 1.13 was converted to the 4-nitrophenyl carbamate 1.15 by reaction with 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate. Subsequent treatment with an amine (or amine hydrochloride salt) of choice provided the target compound 1.14. Method E

In yet another variation, the dipeptide hydrochloride salt 1.03 was converted to the 4-nitrophenyl carbamate as described above. Treatment with an amine (or amine hydrochloride salt) of choice provided the urea derivative 1.05. Hydrolysis and further elaboration as described in Methods A/B provided the target compounds 1.14. The Following Experimental Section Applies for the Preparation of the Compounds of Formula XVIII:

Example 3

Preparation of Compound of Formula 3

To a cooled solution (0° C.) of the intermediates 1.06 (75.0 mg, 0.2 mmol) and 1.09 (100.0 mg, 0.36 mmol) in DMF (5.0 mL) was added HATU (Aldrich, 76.05 mg, 0.20 mmol), followed by DIPEA (0.102 mL, 6 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for two days then warmed up to room temperature, diluted with ethyl acetate (40.0 mL), washed with 5% KH₂PO₄ containing 0.05 vol. of 1M H₃PO₄ and brine. Organic layer was dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated to dryness. Residue was purified over silica gel using acetone-CH₂Cl₂ (1:9 to 1:1) to get 8.0 mg of product of formula 3 (6.5% yield); LCMS: (590.1).

One skilled in the art would understand that other suitable compounds of Formula XVIII can be prepared in a similar manner to that disclosed above.

The Following Experimental Section Applies for the Preparation of the Compounds of Formula XIX:

Synthesis of Preparative Examples

Synthesis of Example 101

Step 1

To a stirred solution of the proline derivative 1.01 (3.66 mmol, prepared as described above) in dichloromethane (20 mL) and DMF (15 mL) at 0° C. was added L-boc-tert-leucine (930 mg, 4.03 mmol), DIPEA (2.02 mL, 10.98 mmol) and HATU (1.8 g, 4.76 mmol). After 15 minutes at that temperature, the reaction flask was stored in the freezer (−20° C.), overnight (16 hr). The reaction mixture was diluted with dichloromethane (80 mL) and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (80 mL), 10% aq. citric acid solution (80 mL), brine (80 mL), dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated. The crude material was purified by silica chromatography using 25/75 to 50/50 EtOAc/hexanes to provide 1.77 g of the required material, 101a. LC-MS: 518.1 (M+H)⁺. Step 2

To a solution of the methyl ester 101a (1.21 g, 2.34 mmol) in THF (10 mL) and MeOH (5 mL) was added aq. 1M LiOH solution (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at RT for 4 h. It was then concentrated, diluted with water (50 mL) and acidified with solid citric acid (pH approximately 3) when white solid material crashed out. This solid was filtered off, washed with water and dried in vacuo to afford 970 mg of 101b. LC-MS: 504.1 (M+H)⁺. Step 3

The acid 101b (503 mg, 1 mmol) was coupled with intermediate 13.06 (334 mg, 1.5 mmol) using essentially procedure described above (Step 1, preparation of 101a) to provide 101c which was used without purification. MS: 672.37 (M+H)⁺. Step 4

To a solution of the hydroxyl compound 101c from above in dichloromethane (15 mL) was added Dess-Martin's periodinane (848 mg, 2 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at RT for 5 h. At this time, the reaction mixture was diluted with dichloromethane (30 mL) and washed with 1:1 mixture of aq. 10% sodium thiosulfate solution and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (2×25 mL each), brine (50 mL), dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated. The crude material was purified by silica chromatography using 15/85 to 50/50 acetone/hexanes to provide 410 mg of the required material, 101d. LC-MS: 670.2 (M+H)⁺. Step 5

Deprotection of the N-boc functionality of 101d to provide the required material 101e was carried out as described for intermediate 1.01, Step 3 (reaction time=2 h). LC-MS: 570.1 (M+H)⁺. Step 6

To a solution of the amine salt 101e (60 mg, 0.1 mmol) in dichloromethane (2 mL) at 0° C. was added DIPEA (0.06 mL, 0.3 mmol) followed by the isocyanate intermediate 65.01 (0.25 M solution in toluene, 0.8 mL, 0.2 mmol). After 15 minutes at that temperature, the reaction flask was stored in the freezer (−20° C.), overnight (16 hr). The reaction mixture was diluted with dichloromethane (20 mL) and washed with saturated ammonium chloride solution (20 mL), brine (20 mL), dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated. The crude material was purified by silica chromatography using 15/85 to 50/50 acetone/hexanes to provide the required compound 101 (53 mg); LC-MS: 872.2 (M+H)⁺.

One skilled in the art would understand that other suitable compounds of Formula XIX can be prepared in a similar manner to that disclosed above.

The Following Experimental Section Applies for the Preparation of the Compounds of Formulae Ia, Ib and Ic:

Abbreviations:

Abbreviations which are used in the descriptions of the schemes, preparations and the examples that follow are:

• THF: Tetrahydrofuran
• DMF: N,N-Dimethylformamide
• EtOAc: Ethyl acetate
• AcOH: Acetic acid
• HOOBt: 3-Hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazin-4(3H)-one
• EDCl: 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride
• NMM: N-Methylmorpholine
• MeOH: Methanol
• EtOH: Ethanol
• Et2O: Diethyl ether
• DMSO: Dimethylsulfoxide
• K^tBuO: Potassium tert-butoxide
• DCM: Dichloromethane
• Chg: Cyclohexylglycine
• Bn: Benzyl
• Et: Ethyl
• Ph: Phenyl
• iPr: isopropyl
• ^tBu or Bu^t: tert-Butyl
• Boc: tert-Butyloxycarbonyl
• Cbz: Benzyloxycarbonyl
• HATU: O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate
• BOP: Benzotriazol-1-yl-oxy-tris(dimethylamino)hexafluorophosphate

10% Pd/C: 10% Palladium on carbon (by weight).

Example

Synthesis of (1R,5S)—N-[3-Amino-1-(Cyclobutylmethyl)-2,3-Dioxopropyl]-3-[2(S)-[[[(1,1-Dimethylethyl)Amino]Carbonyl]Amino]-3,3-Dimethyl-1-Oxobutyl]-6,6-Dimethyl-3-Azabicyclo[3.1.0]Hexan-2(S)-Carboxamide (Structure Ia):

Step 1

A stirred solution of the ketimime 1a′ (50 g, 187.1 mmol, available from Aldrich Chemical Company, Milwaukee, Wis.) under N₂ in dry THF (400 mL) was cooled to −78° C. and treated with 1 M solution of K-^tBuO (220 mL, 1.15 equiv.) in THF. The reaction mixture was warmed to 0° C. and stirred for 1 h and treated with bromomethylcyclobutane (28 mL, 249 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 48 h and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in Et₂O (300 mL) and treated with aq. HCl (2 M, 300 mL) The resulting solution was stirred at room temperature for 5 h and extracted with Et₂O (1 L). The aqueous layer was made basic to pH ˜12-14 with aq. NaOH (50%) and extracted with CH₂Cl₂ (3×300 mL). The combined organic layers were dried (MgSO₄), filtered, and concentrated to give pure amine (1b′, 18 g) as a colorless oil. Step 2.

A solution of the amine 1b′ (18 g, 105.2 mmol) at 0° C. in CH₂Cl₂ (350 mL) was treated with di-tert-butyldicarbonate (23 g, 105.4 mmol) and stirred at rt. for 12 h. After the completion of the reaction (TLC), the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was dissolved in THF/H₂O (200 ml, 1:1) and treated with LiOH.H₂O (6.5 g, 158.5 mmol) and stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the basic aqueous layer was extracted with Et₂O. The aqueous layer was acidified with conc. HCl to pH˜1-2 and extracted with CH₂Cl₂. The combined organic layers were dried (MgSO₄), filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to yield 1c′ as a colorless viscous oil which was used for next step without any further purification. Step 3.

A solution of the acid 1c′ (15.0 g, 62 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (250 mL) was treated with BOP reagent (41.1 g, 93 mmol), N-methylmorpholine (27 mL), N,O-dimethyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride (9.07 g, 93 mmol) and stirred overnight at rt. The reaction mixture was diluted with 1 N aq. HCl (250 mL), and the layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with CH₂Cl₂ (3×300 ml). The combined organic layers were dried (MgSO₄), filtered, concentrated in vacuo and purified by chromatography (SiO₂, EtOAc/Hex 2:3) to yield the amide 1d (15.0 g) as a colorless solid. Step 4.

A solution of the amide 1d (15 g, 52.1 mmol) in dry THF (200 mL) was treated dropwise with a solution of LiAlH₄ (1M, 93 mL, 93 mmol) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h and carefully quenched at 0° C. with a solution of KHSO₄ (10% aq.) and stirred for 0.5 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with aq. HCl (1 M, 150 mL) and extracted with CH₂Cl₂ (3×200 mL), The combined organic layers were washed with aq. HCl (1 M), saturated NaHCO₃, brine, and dried (MgSO₄). The mixture was filtered and concentrated in vacuo to yield 1e as viscous colorless oil (14 g). Step 5.

A solution of the aldehyde 1e (14 g, 61.6 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (50 mL), was treated with Et₃N (10.73 mL, 74.4 mmol), and acetone cyanohydrin (10.86 g, 127.57 mmol) and stirred at room temperature for 24 hrs. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and diluted with aq. HCl (1 M, 200 mL) and extracted into CH₂Cl₂ (3×200 mL). The combined organic layer were washed with H₂O, brine, dried (MgSO₄), filtered, concentrated in vacuo and purified by chromatography (SiO₂, EtOAc/Hex 1:4) to yield 1f (10.3 g) as a colorless liquid as a mixture of diastereomers. Step 6.

Methanol saturated with HCl*, prepared by bubbling HCl gas to CH₃OH (700 ml) at 0° C., was treated with cyanohydrin 1f and heated to reflux for 24 h. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo to yield 1g, which was used in the next step without purification.

* Alternatively 6M HCl prepared by addition of AcCl to dry methanol can also be used.

Step 7.

A solution of the amine hydrochloride 1g in CH₂Cl₂ (200 mL) was treated with Et₃N (45.0 mL, 315 mmol) and Boc₂O (45.7 g, 209 mmol) at −78° C. The reaction mixture was then stirred at room temperature overnight and diluted with HCl (2 M, 200 mL) and extracted into CH₂Cl₂. The combined organic layers were dried (MgSO₄) filtered, concentrated in vacuo and purified by chromatography (EtOAc/Hex 1:4) to yield hydroxy ester 1 h. Step 8.

A solution of methyl ester 1h (3 g, 10.5 mmol) in THF/H₂O (1:1) was treated with LiOH.H₂O (645 mg, 15.75 mmol) and stirred at rt. for 2 h. The reaction mixture was acidified with aq HCl (1 M, 15 mL) and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dried in vacuum.

A solution of the acid in CH₂Cl₂ (50 mL) and DMF (25 mL) was treated with NH₄Cl (2.94 g, 5.5 mmol), EDCl (3.15 g, 16.5 mmol), HOOBt (2.69 g, 16.5 mmol), and NMM (4.4 g, 44 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 d. The solvents were removed under vacuo and the residue was diluted with aq. HCl (250 mL) and extracted with CH₂Cl₂. The combined organic layers were washed with aq. saturated NaHCO₃, dried (MgSO₄) filtered concentrated in vacuo to obtain 1i, which was used as it is in the following steps. (Alternatively 1i can also be obtained directly by the reaction of 1f (4.5 g, 17.7 mmol) with aq. H₂O₂ (10 mL), LiOH.H₂O (820 mg, 20.8 mmol) at 0° C. in 50 mL of CH₃OH for 0.5 h.) Step 9.

A solution of 1i obtained in the previous step was dissolved in 4 N HCl in dioxane and stirred at rt. for 2 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to give 1j as a solid, which was used without further purification. Step 10.

The amino ester 1l was prepared following the method of R. Zhang and J. S. Madalengoitia (J. Org. Chem. 1999, 64, 330), with the exception that the Boc group was cleaved by the reaction of the Boc-protected amino acid with methanolic HCl.

A solution of Boc-tert-Lue 1k (Fluka, 5.0 g 21.6 mmol) in dry CH₂Cl₂/DMF (50 mL, 1:1) was cooled to 0° C. and treated with the amine 1l (5.3 g, 25.7 mmol), NMM (6.5 g, 64.8 mmol) and BOP reagent (11.6 g, 25.7 mmol). The reaction was stirred at rt. for 24 hrs, diluted with aq. HCl (1 M) and extracted with CH₂Cl₂. The combined organic layers were washed with HCl (aq, 1 M), saturated NaHCO₃, brine, dried (MgSO₄), filtered and concentrated in vacuo and purified by chromatography (SiO₂, acetone/hexane 1:5) to yield 1m as a colorless solid. Step 11.

A solution of methyl ester 1m (4.0 g, 10.46 mmol) was dissolved in HCl (4 M solution in dioxane) and stirred at rt. for 3 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to obtain the amine hydrochloride salt used in the next step without further purification.

A solution of the amine hydrochloride salt (397 mg, 1.24 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (10 mL) was cooled to −78° C. and treated with tert-butyl isocyanate (250 mg, 2.5 mmol) and stirred at rt. overnight. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was diluted with aq. HCl (1M) and extracted with CH₂Cl₂. The combined organic layers were washed with aq. HCl (1M), saturated NaHCO₃ and brine. The organic layers were dried, filtered and concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified by chromatography (SiO₂, acetone/Hex 1:4) to yield 1n as a colorless solid. Step 12.

A solution of methyl ester 1n (381 mg, 1.0 mmol) in THF/H₂O (1:1, 5 mL) was treated with LiOH.H₂O (62 mg, 1.5 mmol) and stirred at rt. for 3 h. The reaction mixture was acidified with aq. HCl and concentrated in vacuo to obtain the free acid.

A solution of acid (254.9 mg, 0.69 mmol) in DMF/CH₂Cl₂ (1:1, 5.0 mL) was treated with amine 1j (159 mg, 0.763 mmol), EDCl (199 mg, 1.04 mmol), HOOBt (169.5 mg, 1.04 mmol) and NMM (280 mg, 2.77 mmol) at −20° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at −20° C. for 48 h and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was diluted with aq. 1M HCl and extracted with EtOAc, The combined organic layers were extracted with aq. NaHCO₃, aq. HCl, brine, dried (MgSO₄) filtered, concentrated in vacuo to obtain 10 (470 mg) as a tan colored solid that was used in the next reaction without further purification. Step 13.

A solution of amide 10 (470 mg, 0.9 mmol) in toluene and DMSO (1:1 20 mL) at 0° C. was treated with EDCl (1.72 g, 9.0 mmol) and dichloroacetic acid (0.37 mL, 4.5 mmol) and stirred at 0° C. for 4 hrs. The reaction mixture was diluted with CH₂Cl₂, and washed with saturated NaHCO₃, and brine. The organic layer was dried (MgSO₄), filtered, concentrated, in vacuo and purified by chromatography (SiO₂, acetone/hexanes 3:7) to yield 1a as a colorless solid. Separation of the Compound of Formula 1 into Diastereomers of Formulas Ib and Ic:

Preparative HPLC Condition for Separation

COLUMN USED:     NORMAL PHASE YMC DIOL-NP COLUMN
                 120 Å, S-10/20; 50 mm × 500 mm I.D/length
SOLVENT A:       Hexanes
SOLVENT B:       To make 4 L of solvent (1.7 L Isopropanol +
                 300 mL of CH3CN + 2 L of CH2Cl2)
HPLC CONDITIONS: 12% of Solvent B/88% of Solvent A
FLOW:            120 mL/min

Procedure: 1 g of compound 1a was dissolved in 10 mL of CH₂Cl₂/25 mL of Hexanes and injected into the column. It was eluted with 120 mL/min and two peaks were independently collected and concentrated. The solid residue was further dried in high vacuum and analyzed by analytical HPLC. Since the polar (second isomer) contained 2.6% of nonpolar diastereomer (First isomer), it was purified once more to isolate the pure diastereomers.

Analytical Conditions for Analysis of Diastereomeric Purity

COLUMN USED:     NORMAL PHASE YMC DIOL-NP COLUMN
                 200 Å, S-5 □M; 150 mm × 3 mm length/I.D
SOLVENT A:       Hexanes
SOLVENT B:       To make 4 L of solvent (1.7 L Isopropanol +
                 300 mL of CH3CN + 2 L of CH2Cl2)
HPLC CONDITIONS: 8.5% of Solvent B/91.5% of Solvent A
FLOW:            0.7 mL/min
Rt               Nonpolar isomer (compound Ib) = 13.2 min
                 Polar isomer (compound Ic) = 16.1 min

2.5 mg of compound in 1 mL was used and 20 μL was injected and analyzed with a U.V detector at λ=254 nm. Analytical Data for Compounds 2 and 3. Compound 3 [Polar Diastereomer]

¹H NMR (d₆-dmso, 500 MHz): δ 8.26 (d, 1H, J=7.0 Hz), 8.00 (s, 1H), 7.75 (s, 1H), 5.96 (s, 1H), 5.84 (d, 1H, J=10 Hz), 4.96 (m, 1H), 4.28 (s, 1H), 4.11 (d, 1H, J=11 Hz), 3.94 (d, 1H, J=10 Hz), 3.73 (dd, 1H, J=10 & 5 Hz), 2.48 (m, 1H), 1.95 (m, 2H), 1.61 (m, 1H), 1.59 (m, 1H), 1.77(m, 1H), 1.57 (m, 1H), 1.74 (m, 2H), 1.42 (dd, 1H, J=7.5 & 5 Hz), 1.28 (d, 1H, J=7.5 Hz), 1.17 (s, 9H), 1.01 (s, 3H), 0.90 (s, 9H), 0.85 (s, 3H). ¹³C NMR (d₆-dmso, 125 MHz): δ 197.8, 170.9, 170.8, 162.8, 157.4, 59.1, 56.8, 51.8, 48.9, 47.4, 36.7, 34.0, 32.0, 30.6, 29.1, 27.8, 27.3, 27.1, 26.4, 26.1, 18.5, 17.7, 12.5. MS [FAB] 520 (55), 421 (100), 308 (75), 213 (90). HRMS calcd for C₂₇H₄₆O₅N₅ [M+1]⁺ 520.3499; observed: 520.3505.

Compound 2 [Non-Polar Diastereomer]

¹H NMR (d₆-dmso, 500 MHz): δ 8.15 (d, 1H, J=7.0 Hz), 7.96 (s, 1H), 7.74 (s, 1H), 5.96 (s, 1H), 5.86 (d, 1H, J=10 Hz), 4.85 (m, 1H), 4.27 (s, 1H), 4.13 (d, 1H, J=11.0 Hz), 3.97 (d, 1H, J=10 Hz), 3.76 (dd, 1H, J=10 & 5 Hz), 2.36 (m, 1H), 1.97 (m, 2H), 1.60 (m, 2H), 1.78 (m, 1H), 1.64 (m, 1H), 1.75 (m, 2H), 1.44 (dd, 1H, J=7.5 & 5 Hz), 1.27 (d, 1H, J=7.5 Hz), 1.17 (s, 9H), 1.00 (s, 3H), 0.89 (s, 9H), 0.82 (s, 3H). ¹³C NMR (d₆-dmso 125 MHz): δ 197.1, 171.1, 170.7, 163.0, 157.3, 59.4, 56.9, 52.1, 48.9, 47.4, 36.6, 34.0, 32.1, 30.5, 29.1, 27.9, 27.4, 26.8, 26.4, 26.1, 18.5, 17.8, 12.4. MS [FAB] 520 (40), 421 (100), 308 (60), 213 (65). HRMS calcd. for C₂₇H₄₆O₅N₅ [M+1]⁺ 520.3499; observed: 520.3514.

It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that changes could be made to the embodiments described above without departing from the broad inventive concept thereof. It is understood, therefore, that this invention is not limited to the particular embodiments disclosed, but it is intended to cover modifications that are within the spirit and scope of the invention, as defined by the appended claims.

Each document (including granted patents, published patent applications, and nonpatent publications such as journal articles) referred to in this application is incorporated in its entirety by reference for all purposes.

Claims

1. A controlled-release dosage formulation comprising at least one compound selected from the group consisting of Formula I to XXVIII below:

2. A method for modulating the activity of Hepatitis C virus (HCV) protease in a subject, wherein the method comprises administering to a subject in need of such treatment at least one HCV protease inhibitor in a pharmaceutically effective amount thereof in a controlled-release formulation of claim 1.

3. A method for treating diseases or disorders associated with cathepsin activity and/or for inhibiting cathepsin activity in a subject, wherein the method comprises administering to a subject in need of such treatment at least one HCV protease inhibitor in a pharmaceutically effective amount thereof in a controlled-release formulation of claim 1.

4. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 or 2, wherein the at least one compound treats, prevents, and/or ameliorates disorders associated with HCV.

5. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 or 2, wherein the at least one compound treats and/or reduces signs and/or symptoms associated with HCV.

6. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of:

7. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of:

8. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of:

9. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein said dosage formulation comprises at least one dosage unit.

10. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of claim 9, wherein said dosage formulation comprises a plurality of dosage units.

11. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of claim 10, wherein said dosage formulation comprises from 2-100 dosage units.

12. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the dosage formulation is capable of maintaining a suitable therapeutically efficacious average Cmin plasma concentration of the at least one compound.

13. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the dosage formulation is capable of maintaining an average Cmin plasma concentration of the at least one compound at or above about 10 ng/ml.

14. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the dosage formulation is capable of maintaining an average Cmin plasma concentration of the at least one compound at or above about 50 ng/ml.

15. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the dosage formulation is capable of maintaining an average Cmin plasma concentration of the at least one compound at or above about 100 ng/ml.

16. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the dosage formulation is capable of maintaining an average Cmin plasma concentration of the at least one compound at or above about 150 ng/ml.

17. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the dosage formulation is capable of maintaining an average Cmin plasma concentration of the at least one compound at or above about 200 ng/ml.

18. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the dosage formulation is an oral dosage formulation.

19. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of claim 18, wherein the oral dosage formulation is selected from the group consisting of tablets, capsules, and caplets.

20. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the dosage formulation contains from about 1 mg to about 3000 mg of the at least one compound.

21. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the controlled-release dosage formulation is administered in an asymmetric pattern to coincide with a circadian rhythm of the subject.

22. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein at least one compound is administered as combination therapy with at least one of an antiviral agent which is different from the at least one compound and/or an immunomodulatory agent.

23. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of claim 22, wherein at least one of an antiviral agent which is different from the at least one compound and/or the immunomodulatory agent are administered concurrently or sequentially with the at least one compound.

24. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method claim 22, wherein at least one of an antiviral agent which is different from the at least one compound and/or the immunomodulatory agent are a part of the controlled-release dosage formulation.

25. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of claim 22, wherein at least one of an antiviral agent which is different from the at least one compound and/or the immunomodulatory agent are selected from the group consisting of ribavirin, levovirin, VP 50406, ISIS 14803, Heptazyme, VX 497, Thymosin, Maxamine, mycophenolate mofetil, interferon, and a mixture of two or more thereof.

26. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of claim 25, wherein the interferon is selected from the group consisting of interferon-alpha, PEG-interferon alpha conjugates and consensus interferon.

27. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, further comprising at least one anti-cancer agent.

28. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein in controlled-release carrier is selected from the group consisting of ion-exchange resins, and swellable polymers.

29. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of claim 28, wherein the swellable polymer is a biocompatible, hydrophilic polymer.

30. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of claim 29, wherein the biocompatible, hydrophilic polymer is a cellulosic polymer.

31. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of claim 30, wherein the cellulosic polymer is selected from the group consisting of methylcellulose, hydroxymethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, and a mixture of two or more thereof.

32. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of claim 28, wherein a sufficient amount of the swellable polymer is present to obtain a weight gain level of the dosage formulation from about 2 to about 60 percent.

33. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of claim 28, wherein the swellable polymer is present at from about 10 to 75 weight percent (wt. %).

34. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of:

35. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of: Formula XXVIII:

36. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of:

37. The controlled-release dosage formulation or method of any of claims 1 to 5, wherein the dosage formulation is capable of maintaining an average Cmin plasma concentration of the at least one compound at or above about 1000 ng/ml.

38. A controlled-release dosage formulation comprising the following ingredients: (a) at least one compound selected from the group consisting of Formula I to XXVIII below: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein: Y is selected from the group consisting of the following moieties: alkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino and heterocycloalkylamino, with the proviso that Y maybe optionally substituted with X11 or X12; X11 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, with the proviso that X11 may be additionally optionally substituted with X12; X12 is hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, or nitro, with the proviso that said alkyl, alkoxy, and aryl may be additionally optionally substituted with moieties independently selected from X12; R1 is COR5, wherein R5 is COR7 wherein R7 is NHR9, wherein R9 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, [CH(R1′)]pCOOR11, [CH(R1′)]pCONR12R13, [CH(R1′)]pSO2R11, [CH(R1′)]pCOR11, [CH(R1′)]pCH(OH)R11, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2)COOR11, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)CONR12R13, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2)R11, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)CONHCH(R3′)COOR11, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)CONHCH(R3′)CONR12R13, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)CONHCH(R3′)CONHCH(R4′)COOR11, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)CONHCH(R3′)CONHCH(R4′)CONR12R13, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)CONHCH(R3′)CONHCH(R4′)CONHCH(R5′)COOR11 and CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)CONH CH(R3′)CONHCH(R4′)CONHCH(R5′)CONR12R13, wherein R1′, R2′, R3′, R4′, R5′, R11, R12, R13, and R′ are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyl-aryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, aryl-alkyl and heteroaralkyl; Z is selected from O, N, CH or CR; W maybe present or absent, and if W is present, W is selected from C═O, C═S, C(═N—CN), or SO2; Q maybe present or absent, and when Q is present, Q is CH, N, P, (CH2)p, (CHR)p, (CRR′)p, O, NR, S, or SO2; and when Q is absent, M may be present or absent; when Q and M are absent, A is directly linked to L; A is O, CH2, (CHR)p, (CHR—CHR′)p, (CRR′)p, NR, S, SO2 or a bond; E is CH, N, CR, or a double bond towards A, L or G; G may be present or absent, and when G is present, G is (CH2)p, (CHR)p, or (CRR′)p; and when G is absent, J is present and E is directly connected to the carbon atom in Formula I as G is linked to; J may be present or absent, and when J is present, J is (CH2)p, (CHR)p, or (CRR′)p, SO2, NH, NR or O; and when J is absent, G is present and E is directly linked to N shown in Formula I as linked to J; L may be present or absent, and when L is present, L is CH, CR, O, S or NR; and when L is absent, then M may be present or absent; and if M is present with L being absent, then M is directly and independently linked to E, and J is directly and independently linked to E; M may be present or absent, and when M is present, M is O, NR, S, SO2, (CH2)p, (CHR)p (CHR—CHR′)p, or (CRR′)p; p is a number from 0 to 6; and R, R′, R2, R3 and R4 are independently selected from the group consisting of H; C1-C10 alkyl; C2-C10 alkenyl; C3-C8 cycloalkyl; C3-C8 heterocycloalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, halogen; (cycloalkyl)alkyl and (heterocycloalkyl)alkyl, wherein said cycloalkyl is made of three to eight carbon atoms, and zero to six oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms, and said alkyl is of one to six carbon atoms; aryl; heteroaryl; alkyl-aryl; and alkyl-heteroaryl; wherein said alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl moieties may be optionally and chemically-suitably substituted, with said term “substituted” referring to optional and chemically-suitable substitution with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, halogen, hydroxy, thio, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, sulfoxide, sulfone, sulfonyl urea, hydrazide, and hydroxamate; further wherein said unit N-C-G-E-L-J-N represents a five-membered or six-membered cyclic ring structure with the proviso that when said unit N-C-G-E-L-J-N represents a five-membered cyclic ring structure, or when the bicyclic ring structure in Formula I comprising N, C, G, E, L, J, N, A, Q, and M represents a five-membered cyclic ring structure, then said five-membered cyclic ring structure lacks a carbonyl group as part of the cyclic ring; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein: Z is NH; X is alkylsulfonyl, heterocyclylsulfonyl, heterocyclylalkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, alkylcarbonyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, heterocyclylalkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, heterocyclyloxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, heteroaryloxycarbonyl, alkyaminocarbonyl, heterocyclylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, or heteroarylaminocarbonyl moiety, with the proviso that X may be additionally optionally substituted with R12 or R13; X1 is H; C1-C4 straight chain alkyl; C1-C4 branched alkyl or; CH2-aryl (substituted or unsubstituted); R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl moiety, with the proviso that R12 may be additionally optionally substituted with R13. R13 is hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, or nitro moiety, with the proviso that the alkyl, alkoxy, and aryl may be additionally optionally substituted with moieties independently selected from R13. P1a, P1b, P2, P3, P4, P5, and P6 are independently: H; C1-C10 straight or branched chain alkyl; C2-C10 straight or branched chain alkenyl; C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C3-C8 heterocyclic; (cycloalkyl)alkyl or (heterocyclyl)alkyl, wherein said cycloalkyl is made up of 3 to 8 carbon atoms, and zero to 6 oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms, and said alkyl is of 1 to 6 carbon atoms; aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, wherein said alkyl is of 1 to 6 carbon atoms; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl; (cycloalkyl)alkyl and (heterocyclyl)alkyl moieties may be optionally substituted with R13, and further wherein said P1a and P1b may optionally be joined to each other to form a spirocyclic or spiroheterocyclic ring, with said spirocyclic or spiroheterocyclic ring containing zero to six oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms, and may be additionally optionally substituted with R13; and P1′ is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyl-alkyl, aryl, aryl-alkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaryl-alkyl; with the proviso that said P1′ may be additionally optionally substituted with R13; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula III: G is carbonyl; J and Y may be the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of the moieties: H, alkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino and heterocycloalkylamino, with the proviso that Y maybe additionally optionally substituted with X11 or X12; X11 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl moiety, with the proviso that X11 may be additionally optionally substituted with X12; X12 is hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, or nitro, with the proviso that said alkyl, alkoxy, and aryl may be additionally optionally substituted with moieties independently selected from X12; R1 is COR5 or B(OR)2, wherein R5 is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, OR8, NR9R10, CF3, C2F5, C3F7, CF2R6, R6 and COR7 wherein R7 is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, OR8, CHR9R10, and NR9R10, wherein R6, R8, R9 and R10 may be the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, CH(R1′)COOR11, CH(R1′)CONR12R13, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)COOR11, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)CONR12R13, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)R′, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)CONHCH(R3′)COOR11, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)CONHCH(R3′)CONR12R13, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)CONHCH(R3′)CONHCH(R4′)COOR11, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)CONHCH(R3′)CONHCH(R4′)CONR12R13, CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)CONHCH(R3′)CONHCH(R4′)CONHCH(R5′)COOR11, and CH(R1′)CONHCH(R2′)CONHCH(R3′)CONHCH(R4′)CONHCH(R5′)CONR12R13, wherein R1′, R2′, R3′, R4′, R5′, R11, R12, R13, and R′ may be the same or different and are independently selected from a group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyl-aryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, aryl-alkyl and heteroaralkyl; Z is selected from O, N, or CH; W maybe present or absent, and if W is present, W is selected from C═O, C═S, or SO2; and R, R′, R2, R3 and R4 are independently selected from the group consisting of H; C1-C10 alkyl; C2-C10 alkenyl; C3-C8 cycloalkyl; C3-C8 heterocycloalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro; oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms (with said oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms numbering zero to six); (cycloalkyl)alkyl and (heterocycloalkyl)alkyl, wherein said cycloalkyl is made of three to eight carbon atoms, and zero to six oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms, and said alkyl is of one to six carbon atoms; aryl; heteroaryl; alkyl-aryl; and alkyl-heteroaryl; wherein said alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl moieties may be optionally substituted, with said term “substituted” referring to optional and chemically-suitable substitution with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, halogen, hydroxy, thio, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, sulfonamide, sulfoxide, sulfone, sulfonylurea, hydrazide, and hydroxamate; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula IV: Y is selected from the group consisting of the following moieties: alkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino and heterocycloalkylamino, with the proviso that Y maybe optionally substituted with X11 or X12; X11 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, with the proviso that X11 may be additionally optionally substituted with X12; X12 is hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxyl, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, or nitro, with the proviso that said alkyl, alkoxy, and aryl may be additionally optionally substituted with moieties independently selected from X12; R1 is selected from the following structures: wherein k is a number from 0 to 5, which can be the same or different, R11 denotes optional substituents, with each of said substituents being independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino, heterocycloalkylamino, hydroxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxyl, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, and nitro, with the proviso that R11 (when R11 ≠H) maybe optionally substituted with X11 or X12; Z is selected from O, N, CH or CR; W may be present or absent, and if W is present, W is selected from C═O, C═S, C(═N—CN), or S(O2); Q may be present or absent, and when Q is present, Q is CH, N, P, (CH2)p, (CHR)p, (CRR′)p, O, N(R), S, or S(O2); and when Q is absent, M may be present or absent; when Q and M are absent, A is directly linked to L; A is O, CH2, (CHR)p, (CHR—CHR′)p, (CRR′)p, N(R), S, S(O2) or a bond; E is CH, N, CR, or a double bond towards A, L or G; G may be present or absent, and when G is present, G is (CH2)p, (CHR) p, or (CRR′)p; and when G is absent, J is present and E is directly connected to the carbon atom in Formula I as G is linked to; J may be present or absent, and when J is present, J is (CH2)p, (CHR) p, or (CRR′)p, S(O2), NH, N(R) or O; and when J is absent, G is present and E is directly linked to N shown in Formula I as linked to J; L may be present or absent, and when L is present, L is CH, C(R), O, S or N(R); and when L is absent, then M may be present or absent; and if M is present with L being absent, then M is directly and independently linked to E, and J is directly and independently linked to E; M may be present or absent, and when M is present, M is O, N(R), S, S(O2), (CH2)p, (CHR) p (CHR—CHR′)p, or (CRR′) p; p is a number from 0 to 6; and R, R′, R2, R3 and R4 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H; C1-C10 alkyl; C2-C10 alkenyl; C3-C8 cycloalkyl; C3-C8 heterocycloalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, halogen, (cycloalkyl)alkyl and (heterocycloalkyl)alkyl, wherein said cycloalkyl is made of three to eight carbon atoms, and zero to six oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms, and said alkyl is of one to six carbon atoms; aryl; heteroaryl; alkyl-aryl; and alkyl-heteroaryl; wherein said alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl moieties may be optionally substituted, with said term “substituted” referring to substitution with one or more moieties which can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, halogen, hydroxy, thio, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, sulfoxide, sulfone, sulfonyl urea, hydrazide, and hydroxamate; further wherein said unit N-C-G-E-L-J-N represents a five-membered cyclic ring structure or six-membered cyclic ring structure with the proviso that when said unit N-C-G-E-L-J-N represents a five-membered cyclic ring structure, or when the bicyclic ring structure in Formula I comprising N, C, G, E, L, J, N, A, Q, and M represents a five-membered cyclic ring structure, then said five-membered cyclic ring structure lacks a carbonyl group as part of said five-membered cyclic ring; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula V: (1) R1 is —C(O)R5 or —B(OR)2; (2) R5 is H, —OH, —OR8, —NR9R10, —C(O)OR8, —C(O)NR9R10, —CF3, —C2F5, C3F7, —CF2R6, —R6, —C(O)R7 or NR7SO2R8; (3) R7 is H, —OH, —OR8, or —CHR9R10; (4) R6, R8, R9 and R10 are independently selected from the group consisting of H: alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, R14, —CH(R1′)CH(R1′)C(O)OR11, [CH(R1′)]pC(O)OR11, —[CH(R1′)]pC(O)NR12R13, —[CH(R1′)]pS(O2)R11, —[CH(R1′)]pC(O)R11, —[CH(R1′)]pS(O2)NR12R13, CH(R1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R2′)(R′), CH(R1′)CH(R1′)C(O)NR12R13, —CH(R1′)CH(R1′)S(O2)R11, —CH(R1′)CH(R1′)S(O2)NR12R13, —CH(R1′)CH(R1′)C(O)R11, —[CH(R1′)]pCH(OH)R11, —CH(R1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R2′)C(O)OR11, C(O)N(H)CH(R2′)C(O)OR11, —C(O)N(H)CH(R2′)C(O)R11, CH(R1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R2′)C(O)NR12R13, —CH(R1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R2′)R′, CH(R1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R2′)C(O)N(H)CH(R3′)C(O)OR11, CH(R1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R2′)C(O)CH(R3′)NR12R13, CH(R1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R2′)C(O)N(H)CH(R3′)C(O)NR12R13, CH(R1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R2′)C(O)N(H)CH(R3′)C(O)N(H)CH(R4′)C(O)OR11, H(R1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R2′)C(O)N(H)CH(R3′)C(O)N(H)CH(R4′)C(O)NR12R13, CH(R1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R2′)C(O)N(H)CH(R3′)C(O)N(H)CH(R4′)C(O)N(H)CH(R5′)C(O)OR11, and CH(R1′)C(O)N(H)CH(R2′)C(O)N(H)CH(R3′)C(O)N(H)CH(R4′)C(O)N(H)CH(R5′) C(O)NR12R13; wherein R1′, R2′, R3′, R4′, R5′, R11, R12 and R13 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkyl-aryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl-alkyl and heteroaralkyl; or R12 and R13 are linked together wherein the combination is cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, ary or heteroaryl; R14 is present or not and if present is selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyl-aryl, allyl, alkyl-heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryl-alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl and heteroaralkyl; (5) R and R′ are present or not and if present can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of: H, OH, C1-C10 alkyl, C2-C10 alkenyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C3-C8 heterocycloalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, alkylamino, arylamino, amino, amido, arylthioamino, arylcarbonylamino, arylaminocarboxy, alkylaminocarboxy, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, (aryl)alkyl, heteroarylalkyl, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, halogen, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, (alkyl)aryl, alkylheteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl and (heterocycloalkyl)alkyl, wherein said cycloalkyl is made of three to eight carbon atoms, and zero to six oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms, and said alkyl is of one to six carbon atoms; (6) L′ is H, OH, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl; (7) M′ is H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl or an amino acid side chain; or L′ and M′ are linked together to form a ring structure wherein the portion of structural Formula 1 represented by is represented by structural Formula 2: wherein in Formula 2: E is present or absent and if present is C, CH, N or C(R); J is present or absent, and when J is present, J is (CH2)p, (CHR—CHR′)p, (CHR)p, (CRR′)p, S(O2), N(H), N(R) or O; when J is absent and G is present, L is directly linked to the nitrogen atom marked position 2; p is a number from 0 to 6; L is present or absent, and when L is present, L is C(H) or C(R); when L is absent, M is present or absent; if M is present with L being absent, then M is directly and independently linked to E, and J is directly and independently linked to E; G is present or absent, and when G is present, G is (CH2)p, (CHR)p, (CHR—CHR′)p or (CRR′)p; when G is absent, J is present and E is directly connected to the carbon atom marked position 1; Q is present or absent, and when Q is present, Q is NR, PR, (CR═CR), (CH2)p, (CHR)p, (CRR′)p, (CHR—CHR′)p, O, NR, S, SO, or SO2; when Q is absent, M is (i) either directly linked to A or (ii) an independent substituent on L, said independent substituent being selected from —OR, —CH(R)(R′), S(O)0-2R or —NRR′ or (iii) absent; when both Q and M are absent, A is either directly linked to L, or A is an independent substituent on E, said independent substituent being selected from —OR, —CH(R)(R′), S(O)0-2R or —NRR′ or A is absent; A is present or absent and if present A is O, O(R), (CH2)p, (CHR)p, (CHR—CHR′)p, (CRR′)p, N(R), NRR′, S, S(O2), —OR, CH(R)(R′) or NRR′; or A is linked to M to form an alicyclic, aliphatic or heteroalicyclic bridge; M is present or absent, and when M is present, M is halogen, O, OR, N(R), S, S(O2), (CH2)p, (CHR)p (CHR—CHR′)p, or (CRR′)p; or M is linked to A to form an alicyclic, aliphatic or heteroalicyclic bridge; (8) Z′ is represented by the structural Formula 3: wherein in Formula 3: Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, aryl, alkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, heteroalkyl-heteroaryl, heteroalkyl-heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino and heterocycloalkylamino, and Y is unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or two substituents which are the same or different and are independently selected from X11 or X12; X11 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, and X11 is unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more of X12 moieties which are the same or different and are independently selected; X12 is hydroxy, alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, heteroalkylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl, sulfonylurea, cycloalkylsulfonamido, heteroaryl-cycloalkylsulfonamido, heteroaryl-sulfonamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, or nitro, and said alkyl, alkoxy, and aryl are unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties which are the same or different and are independently selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl; Z is O, N, C(H) or C(R); R31 is H, hydroxyl, aryl, alkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, heteroalkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino or heterocycloalkylamino, and R31 is unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or two substituents which are the same or different and are independently selected from X13 or X14; X13 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, and X13 is unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more of X14 moieties which are the same or different and are independently selected; X14 is hydroxy, alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, heteroalkylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl, cycloalkylsulfonamido, heteroaryl-cycloalkylsulfonamido, heteroarylsulfonamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, or nitro, and said alkyl, alkoxy, and aryl are unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties which are the same or different and are independently selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl; W may be present or absent, and if W is present, W is C(═O), C(═S), C(═N—CN), or S(O2); (9) X is represented by structural Formula 4: wherein in Formula 4: a is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9; b, c, d, e and f are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5; A is C, N, S or O; R29 and R29′ are independently present or absent and if present can be the same or different, each being independently one or two substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halo, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylamino, cycloalkylaminocarbonyl, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, —NH(alkyl), —NH(cycloalkyl), —N(alkyl)2, carboxyl, C(O)O-alkyl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, alkylaryl, aralkenyl, heteroaralkyl, alkylheteroaryl, heteroaralkenyl, hydroxyalkyl, aryloxy, aralkoxy, acyl, aroyl, nitro, aryloxycarbonyl, aralkoxycarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, arylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfinyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, aralkylthio, heteroaralkylthio, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclenyl, Y1Y2N-alkyl-, Y1Y2NC(O)— and Y1Y2NSO2—, wherein Y1 and Y2 can be the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, and aralkyl; or R29 and R29′ are linked together such that the combination is an aliphatic or heteroaliphatic chain of 0 to 6 carbons; R30 is present or absent and if present is one or two substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and cylcoalkyl; (10) D is represented by structural Formula 5: wherein in Formula 5: R32, R33 and R34 are present or absent and if present are independently one or two substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halo, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylamino, spiroalkyl, cycloalkylaminocarbonyl, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, —NH(alkyl), —NH(cycloalkyl), —N(alkyl)2, carboxyl, —C(O)O-alkyl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, alkylaryl, aralkenyl, heteroaralkyl, alkylheteroaryl, heteroaralkenyl, hydroxyalkyl, aryloxy, aralkoxy, acyl, aroyl, nitro, aryloxycarbonyl, aralkoxycarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, arylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfinyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, aralkylthio, heteroaralkylthio, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclenyl, Y1Y2N-alkyl-, Y1Y2NC(O)— and Y1Y2NSO2—, wherein Y1 and Y2 can be the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, and aralkyl; or R32 and R34 are linked together such that the combination forms a portion of a cycloalkyl group; g is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9; h, i, j, k, l and m are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5; and A is C, N, S or O, (11) provided that when structural Formula 2: and W′ is CH or N, both the following conditional exclusions (i) and (ii) apply: conditional exclusion (i): Z′ is not —NH—R36, wherein R36 is H, C6 or 10 aryl, heteroaryl, —C(O)—R37, —CO)—OR37 or —C(O)—NHR37, wherein R37 is C1-6 alkyl or C3-6 cycloalkyl; and conditional exclusion (ii): R1 is not —C(O)OH, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of —C(O)OH, an ester of —C(O)OH or —C(O)NHR38 wherein R38 is selected from the group consisting of C1-8 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C6 to 10 aryl or C7-16 aralkyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula VI: Cap is H, alkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino, carboxyalkylamino, arlylalkyloxy or heterocyclylamino, wherein each of said alkyl, alkyl-aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, aryl-heteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyl-aryloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkyl-arylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, cycloalkylamino, carboxyalkylamino, arlylalkyloxy or heterocyclylamino can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or two substituents which can be the same or different and are independently selected from X1 and X2; P′ is —NHR; X1 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroaryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylamino, alkylheteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, and X1 can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more of X2 moieties which can be the same or different and are independently selected; X2 is hydroxy, alkyl, aryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halogen, cyano, keto, ester or nitro, wherein each of said alkyl, alkoxy, and aryl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties which can be the same or different and are independently selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroaryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylamino, alkylheteroaryl and heteroarylalkyl; W may be present or absent, and when W is present W is C(═O), C(═S), C(═NH), C(═N—OH), C(═N—CN), S(O) or S(O2); Q maybe present or absent, and when Q is present, Q is N(R), P(R), CR═CR′, (CH2)p, (CHR)p, (CRR′)p, (CHR—CHR′)p, O, S, S(O) or S(O2); when Q is absent, M is (i) either directly linked to A or (ii) M is an independent substituent on L and A is an independent substituent on E, with said independent substituent being selected from —OR, —CH(R′), S(O)0-2R or —NRR′; when both Q and M are absent, A is either directly linked to L, or A is an independent substituent on E, selected from —OR, CH(R)(R′), —S(O)0-2R or —NRR′; A is present or absent and if present A is —O—, —O(R)CH2—, —(CHR)p—, —(CHR—CHR′)p—, (CRR′)p, N(R), NRR′, S, or S(O2), and when Q is absent, A is —OR, —CH(R)(R′) or —NRR′; and when A is absent, either Q and E are connected by a bond or Q is an independent substituent on M; E is present or absent and if present E is CH, N, C(R); G may be present or absent, and when G is present, G is (CH2)p, (CHR)p, or (CRR′)p; when G is absent, J is present and E is directly connected to the carbon atom marked position 1; J may be present or absent, and when J is present, J is (CH2)p, (CHR—CHR′)p, (CHR)p, (CRR′)p, S(O2), N(H), N(R) or O; when J is absent and G is present, L is directly linked to the nitrogen atom marked position 2; L may be present or absent, and when L is present, L is CH, N, or CR; when L is absent, M is present or absent; if M is present with L being absent, then M is directly and independently linked to E, and J is directly and independently linked to E; M may be present or absent, and when M is present, M is O, N(R), S, S(O2), (CH2)p, (CHR)p, (CHR—CHR′)p, or (CRR′)p; p is a number from 0 to 6; R, R′ and R3 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of: H, C1-C10 alkyl, C2-C10 alkenyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C3-C8 heterocyclyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, arylthioamino, arylcarbonylamino, arylaminocarboxy, alkylaminocarboxy, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl-alkyl, heteroarylalkyl, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, halogen, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl-aryl, alkylheteroaryl, alkyl-heteroaryl and (heterocyclyl)alkyl; R and R′ in (CRR′) can be linked together such that the combination forms a cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl moiety; and R1 is carbonyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula VII: M is O, N(H), or CH2; n is 0-4; R1 is —OR6, —NR6R7 or where R6 and R7 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, arylamino and alkylamino; R4 and R5 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl and cycloalkyl; or alternatively R4 and R5 together form part of a cyclic 5- to 7-membered ring such that the moiety is represented by where k is 0 to 2; X is selected from the group consisting of: where p is 1 to 2, q is 1-3 and P2 is alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, dialkylamino, alkylamino, arylamino or cycloalkylamino; and R3 is selected from the group consisting of: aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, where Y is O, S or NH, and Z is CH or N, and the R8 moieties can be the same or different, each R8 being independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, hydroxyl, amino, arylamino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, halo, alkylthio, arylthio and alkyloxy; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula VIII: M is O, N(H), or CH2; R1 is —C(O)NHR6, where R6 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, arylamino or alkylamino; P1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl haloalkyl; P3 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl and cycloalkyl fused with aryl; R4 and R5 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl and cycloalkyl; or alternatively R4 and R5 together form part of a cyclic 5- to 7-membered ring such that the moiety is represented by where k is 0 to 2; X is selected from the group consisting of: where p is 1 to 2, q is 1 to 3 and P2 is alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, dialkylamino, alkylamino, arylamino or cycloalkylamino; and R3 is selected from the group consisting of: aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, where Y is O, S or NH, and Z is CH or N, and the R8 moieties can be the same or different, each R8 being independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, hydroxyl, amino, arylamino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, halo, alkylthio, arylthio and alkyloxy; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula IX: M is O, N(H), or CH2; n is 0-4; R1 is —OR6, —NR6R7 or where R6 and R7 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, arylamino and alkylamino; R4 and R5 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl and cycloalkyl; or alternatively R4 and R5 together form part of a cyclic 5- to 7-membered ring such that the moiety is represented by where k is 0 to 2; X is selected from the group consisting of: where p is 1 to 2, q is 1 to 3 and P2 is alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, dialkylamino, alkylamino, arylamino or cycloalkylamino; and R3 is selected from the group consisting of: aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, where Y is O, S or NH, and Z is CH or N, and the R8 moieties can be the same or different, each R8 being independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, hydroxyl, amino, arylamino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, halo, alkylthio, arylthio and alkyloxy; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula X: R1 is NHR9, wherein R9 is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl; A and M can be the same or different, each being independently selected from R, OR, NHR, NRR′, SR, SO2R, and halo; or A and M are connected to each other such that the moiety: shown above in Formula I forms either a three, four, six, seven or eight-membered cycloalkyl, a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl, a six to ten-membered aryl, or a five to ten-membered heteroaryl; E is C(H) or C═; L is C(H), C═, CH2C═, or C═CH2; R, R′, R2, and R3 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, cycloalkyl-, heteroalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, aryl-, heteroaryl-, (cycloalkyl)alkyl-, (heterocyclyl)alkyl-, aryl-alkyl-, and heteroaryl-alkyl-; or alternately R and R′ in NRR′ are connected to each other such that NRR′ forms a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; and Y is selected from the following moieties: wherein G is NH or O; and R15, R16, R17 and R18 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately, R15 and R16 are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl structure, and likewise, independently R17 and R18 are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl; wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of: hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XI: R1 is NHR9, wherein R9 is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl; A and M can be the same or different, each being independently selected from R, NR9R10, SR, SO2R, and halo; or A and M are connected to each other (in other words, A-E-L-M taken together) such that the moiety: shown above in Formula I forms either a three, four, six, seven or eight-membered cycloalkyl, a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl, a six to ten-membered aryl, or a five to ten-membered heteroaryl; E is C(H) or C═; L is C(H), C═, CH2C═, or C═CH2; R, R′, R2, and R3 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, cycloalkyl-, heteroalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, aryl-, heteroaryl-, (cycloalkyl)alkyl-, (heterocyclyl)alkyl-, aryl-alkyl-, and heteroaryl-alkyl-; or alternately R and R′ in NRR′ are connected to each other such that NR9R10 forms a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; Y is selected from the following moieties: wherein Y30 and Y31 are selected from where u is a number 0-6; X is selected from O, NR15, NC(O)R16, S, S(O) and SO2; G is NH or O; and R15, R16, R17, R18, R19, T1, T2, T3 and T4 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately, R17 and R18 are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl; wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of: hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XII: R1 is NHR9, wherein R9 is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl; A and M can be the same or different, each being independently selected from R, OR, NHR, NRR′, SR, SO2R, and halo; or A and M are connected to each other such that the moiety: shown above in Formula I forms either a three, four, six, seven or eight-membered cycloalkyl, a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl, a six to ten-membered aryl, or a five to ten-membered heteroaryl; E is C(H) or C═; L is C(H), C═, CH2C═, or C═CH2; R, R′, R2, and R3 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, cycloalkyl-, heteroalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, aryl-, heteroaryl-, (cycloalkyl)alkyl-, (heterocyclyl)alkyl-, aryl-alkyl-, and heteroaryl-alkyl-; or alternately R and R′ in NRR′ are connected to each other such that NRR′ forms a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; and Y is selected from the following moieties: wherein G is NH or O; and R15, R16, R17, R18, and R19 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately, (i) either R15 and R16 are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered cyclic structure, or R15 and R19 are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered cyclic structure, and (ii) likewise, independently, R17 and R18 are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl; wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of: □ulfonam, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, □ulfonamide, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XIII: R1 is NHR9, wherein R9 is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl; A and M can be the same or different, each being independently selected from R, OR, NHR, NRR′, SR, SO2R, and halo; or A and M are connected to each other (in other words, A-E-L-M taken together) such that the moiety: shown above in Formula I forms either a three, four, six, seven or eight-membered cycloalkyl, a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl, a six to ten-membered aryl, or a five to ten-membered heteroaryl; E is C(H) or C═; L is C(H), C═, CH2C═, or C═CH2; R, R′, R2, and R3 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, cycloalkyl-, heteroalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, aryl-, heteroaryl-, (cycloalkyl)alkyl-, (heterocyclyl)alkyl-, aryl-alkyl-, and heteroaryl-alkyl-; or alternately R and R′ in NRR′ are connected to each other such that NRR′ forms a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; and Y is selected from the following moieties: wherein G is NH or O, and R15, R16, R17, R18, R19 and R20 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, C1-C10 alkyl, C1-C10 heteroalkyl, C2-C10 alkenyl, C2-C10 heteroalkenyl, C2-C10 alkynyl, C2-C10 heteroalkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C3-C8 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alternately: (i) either R15 and R16 can be connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl, or R15 and R19 are connected to each other to form a five to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl, or R15 and R20 are connected to each other to form a five to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl, and (ii) likewise, independently, R17 and R18 are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl, wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of: hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XIV: R1 is NHR9, wherein R9 is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl; A and M can be the same or different, each being independently selected from R, OR, NHR, NRR′, SR, SO2R, and halo; or A and M are connected to each other such that the moiety: shown above in Formula I forms either a three, four, six, seven or eight-membered cycloalkyl, a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl, a six to ten-membered aryl, or a five to ten-membered heteroaryl; E is C(H) or C═; L is C(H), C═, CH2C═, or C═CH2; R, R′, R2, and R3 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately R and R′ in NRR′ are connected to each other such that NRR′ forms a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; and Y is selected from the following moieties: wherein G is NH or O; and R15, R16, R17 and R18 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl, or alternately, (i) R15 and R16 are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered cyclic structure, and (ii) likewise, independently R17 and R18 are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl; wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of: hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XV: R1 is NHR9, wherein R9 is H, alkyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, cycloalkyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl; E and J can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of R, OR, NHR, NRR7, SR, halo, and S(O2)R, or E and J can be directly connected to each other to form either a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl, or a three to eight-membered heterocyclyl moiety; Z is N(H), N═, or O, with the proviso that when Z is O, G is present or absent and if G is present with Z being O, then G is C(═O); G maybe present or absent, and if G is present, G is C(═O) or S(O2), and when G is absent, Z is directly connected to Y; Y is selected from the group consisting of: R, R7, R2, R3, R4 and R5 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, cycloalkyl-, heteroalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, aryl-, heteroaryl-, (cycloalkyl)alkyl-, (heterocyclyl)alkyl-, aryl-alkyl-, and heteroaryl-alkyl-, wherein each of said heteroalkyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl independently has one to six oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atoms; wherein each of said alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl and heterocyclyl moieties can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, halo, hydroxy, thio, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, ester, carboxylic acid, carbamate, urea, ketone, aldehyde, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, sulfoxide, sulfone, sulfonyl urea, hydrazide, and hydroxamate; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XVI: R1 is NHR9, wherein R9 is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl; R2 and R3 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl; Y is selected from the following moieties: wherein G is NH or O; and R15, R16, R17, R18, R19, R20, R21, R22, R23, R24 and R25 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately (i) R17 and R18 are independently connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl; (ii) likewise independently R15 and R19 are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; (iii) likewise independently R15 and R16 are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; (iv) likewise independently R15 and R20 are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; (v) likewise independently R22 and R23 are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; and (vi) likewise independently R24 and R25 are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XVII: R1 is NHR9, wherein R9 is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl; A and M can be the same or different, each being independently selected from R, OR, NHR, NRR′, SR, SO2R, and halo; or A and M are connected to each other such that the moiety: shown above in Formula I forms either a three, four, six, seven or eight-membered cycloalkyl, a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl, a six to ten-membered aryl, or a five to ten-membered heteroaryl; E is C(H) or C═; L is C(H), C═, CH2C═, or C═CH2; R, R′, R2, and R3 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, cycloalkyl-, heteroalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, aryl-, heteroaryl-, (cycloalkyl)alkyl-, (heterocyclyl)alkyl-, aryl-alkyl-, and heteroaryl-alkyl-; or alternately R and R′ in NRR′ are connected to each other such that NRR′ forms a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; Y is selected from the following moieties: wherein Y30 is selected from where u is a number 0-1; X is selected from O, NR15, NC(O)R16, S, S(O) and SO2; G is NH or O; and R15, R16, R17, R18, R19, T1, T2, and T3 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately, R17 and R18 are connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl; wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of: hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XVIII: R8 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, heteroarylalkyl-, and heterocyclylalkyl; R9 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl and cycloalkyl; A and M can be the same or different, each being independently selected from R, OR, N(H)R, N(RR′), SR, S(O2)R, and halo; or A and M are connected to each other (in other words, A-E-L-M taken together) such that the moiety: shown above in Formula I forms either a three, four, five, six, seven or eight-membered cycloalkyl, a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl, a six to ten-membered aryl, or a five to ten-membered heteroaryl; E is C(H) or C(R); L is C(H), C(R), CH2C(R), or C(R)CH2; R and R′ can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, cycloalkyl-, heteroalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, aryl-, heteroaryl-, (cycloalkyl)alkyl-, (heterocyclyl)alkyl-, aryl-alkyl-, and heteroaryl-alkyl-; or alternately R and R′ in N(RR′) are connected to each other such that N(RR′) forms a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; R2 and R3 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, spiro-linked cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl; Y is selected from the following moieties: wherein G is NH or O; and R15, R16, R17, R18, R19 and R20 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately (i) R17 and R18 are independently connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl; (ii) likewise independently R15 and R19 are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; (iii) likewise independently R15 and R16 are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; and (iv) likewise independently R15 and R20 are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, spiro-linked cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XIX: Z is selected from the group consisting of a heterocyclyl moiety, N(H)(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —N(H)(cycloalkyl), —N(cycloalkyl)2, —N(H)(aryl, —N(aryl)2, —N(H)(heterocyclyl), —N(heterocyclyl)2, —N(H)(heteroaryl), and —N(heteroaryl)2; R1 is NHR9, wherein R9 is H, alkyl-, alkenyl-, alkynyl-, aryl-, heteroalkyl-, heteroaryl-, cycloalkyl-, heterocyclyl-, arylalkyl-, or heteroarylalkyl; R2 and R3 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl; Y is selected from the following moieties: wherein G is NH or O; and R15, R16, R17, R18, R19, R20 and R21 can be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl, or alternately (i) R17 and R18 are independently connected to each other to form a three to eight-membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl; (ii) likewise independently R15 and R19 are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; (iii) likewise independently R15 and R16 are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; and (iv) likewise independently R15 and R20 are connected to each other to form a four to eight-membered heterocyclyl; wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl can be unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, amino, amido, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamido, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylsulfonamido, arylsulfonamido, keto, carboxy, carbalkoxy, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylureido, arylureido, halo, cyano, and nitro; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XX: a is 0 or 1; b is 0 or 1; Y is H or C1-6alkyl; B is H, an acyl derivative of formula R7—C(O)— or a sulfonyl of formula R7—SO2 wherein R7 is (i) C1-10 alkyl optionally substituted with carboxyl, C1-6 alkanoyloxy or C1-6 alkoxy; (ii) C3-7 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with carboxyl, (C1-6 alkoxy)carbonyl or phenylmethoxycarbonyl; (iii) C6 or C10 aryl or C7-16 aralkyl optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl, hydroxy, or amino optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl; or (iv) Het optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl, hydroxy, amino optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl, or amido optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl; R6, when present, is C1-6 alkyl substituted with carboxyl; R5, when present, is C1-6 alkyl optionally substituted with carboxyl; R4 is C1-10 alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl or C4-10 (alkylcycloalkyl); R3 is C1-10 alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl or C4-10 (alkylcycloalkyl); R2 is CH2—R20, NH—R20, 0-R20 or S—R20, wherein R20 is a saturated or unsaturated C3-7 cycloalkyl or C4-10 (alkyl cycloalkyl) being optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with R21, or R20 is a C6 or C10 aryl or C7-16 aralkyl optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with R21, or R20 is Het or (lower alkyl)-Het optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with R21, wherein each R21 is independently C1-6 alkyl; C1-6alkoxy; amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C1-6 alkyl; sulfonyl; NO2; OH; SH; halo; haloalkyl; amido optionally mono-substituted with C1-6 alkyl, C6 or C10 aryl, C7-16 aralkyl, Het or (lower alkyl)-Het; carboxyl; carboxy(lower alkyl); C6 or C10 aryl, C7-16 aralkyl or Het, said aryl, aralkyl or Het being optionally substituted with R22; wherein R22 is C1-6alkyl; C1-6 alkoxy; amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C1-6 alkyl; sulfonyl; NO2; OH; SH; halo; haloalkyl; carboxyl; amide or (lower alkyl)amide; R1 is C1-6 alkyl or C2-6 alkenyl optionally substituted with halogen; and W is hydroxy or a N-substituted amino. In the above-shown structure of the compound of Formula XX, the terms P6, P5, P4, P3, P2 and P1 denote the respective amino acid moieties as is conventionally known to those skilled in the art; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XXI: B is H, a C6 or C10 aryl, C7-16 aralkyl; Het or (lower alkyl)-Het, all of which optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl; C1-6 alkoxy; C1-6 alkanoyl; hydroxy; hydroxyalkyl; halo; haloalkyl; nitro; cyano; cyanoalkyl; amino optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl; amido; or (lower alkyl)amide; or B is an acyl derivative of formula R4—C(O)—; a carboxyl of formula R4—O—C(O)—; an amide of formula R4—N(R5)—C(O)—; a thioamide of formula R4—N(R5)—C(S)—; or a sulfonyl of formula R4—SO2 wherein R4 is (i) C1-10 alkyl optionally substituted with carboxyl, C1-6 alkanoyl, hydroxy, C1-6 alkoxy, amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C1-6 alkyl, amido, or (lower alkyl) amide; (ii) C3-7 cycloalkyl, C3-7 cycloalkoxy, or C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, all optionally substituted with hydroxy, carboxyl, (C1-6 alkoxy)carbonyl, amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C1-6 alkyl, amido, or (lower alkyl) amide; (iii) amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C1-6 alkyl; amido; or (lower alkyl)amide; (iv) C6 or C10 aryl or C7-16 aralkyl, all optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl, hydroxy, amido, (lower alkyl)amide, or amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C1-6 alkyl; or (v) Het or (lower alkyl)-Het, both optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl, hydroxy, amido, (lower alkyl) amide, or amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C1-6 alkyl; R5 is H or C1-6 alkyl; with the proviso that when R4 is an amide or a thioamide, R4 is not (ii) a cycloalkoxy; Y is H or C1-6 alkyl; R3 is C1-8 alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, or C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, all optionally substituted with hydroxy, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 thioalkyl, amido, (lower alkyl)amido, C6 or C10 aryl, or C7-16 aralkyl; R2 is CH2—R20, NH—R20, O—R20 or S—R20, wherein R20 is a saturated or unsaturated C3-7 cycloalkyl or C4-10 (alkylcycloalkyl), all of which being optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with R21, or R20 is a C6 or C10 aryl or C7-14 aralkyl, all optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with R21, or R20 is Het or (lower alkyl)-Het, both optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with R21, wherein each R21 is independently C1-6 alkyl; C1-6 alkoxy; lower thioalkyl; sulfonyl; N02; OH; SH; halo; haloalkyl; amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C1-6 alkyl, C6 or C10 aryl, C7-14 aralkyl, Het or (lower alkyl)-Het; amido optionally mono-substituted with C1-6 alkyl, C6 or C10 aryl, C7-14 aralkyl, Het or (lower alkyl)-Het; carboxyl; carboxy(lower alkyl); C6 or C10 aryl, C7-14 aralkyl or Het, said aryl, aralkyl or Het being optionally substituted with R22; wherein R22 is C1-6 alkyl; C3-7 cycloalkyl; C1-6 alkoxy; amino optionally mono- or di-substituted with C1-6 alkyl; sulfonyl; (lower alkyl)sulfonyl; N02; OH; SH; halo; haloalkyl; carboxyl; amide; (lower alkyl)amide; or Het optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl; R1 is H; C1-6 alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, or C2-6 alkynyl, all optionally substituted with halogen; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XXII: W is CH or N, R21 is H, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkoxy, hydroxy, or N(R23)2, wherein each R23 is independently H, C1-6 alkyl or C3-6 cycloalkyl; R22 is H, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 thioalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkoxy, C2-7 alkoxyalkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C6 or 10 aryl or Het, wherein Het is a five-, six-, or seven-membered saturated or unsaturated heterocycle containing from one to four heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur; said cycloalkyl, aryl or Het being substituted with R24, wherein R24 is H, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkoxy, NO2, N(R25)2, NH—C(O)—R25 or NH—C(O)—NH—R25, wherein each R25 is independently: H, C1-6 alkyl or C3-6 cycloalkyl; or R24 is NH—C(O)—OR26 wherein R26 is C1-6 alkyl or C3-6 cycloalkyl; R3 is hydroxy, NH2, or a group of formula —NH—R31, wherein R31 is C6 or 10 aryl, heteroaryl, —C(O)—R32, —C(O)—NHR32 or —C(O)—OR32, wherein R32 is C1-6 alkyl or C3-6 cycloalkyl; D is a 5 to 10-atom saturated or unsaturated alkylene chain optionally containing one to three heteroatoms independently selected from: O, S, or N—R41, wherein R41 is H, C1-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl or —C(O)—R42, wherein R42 is C1-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl or C6 or 10 aryl; R4 is H or from one to three substituents at any carbon atom of said chain D, said substituent independently selected from the group consisting of: C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, hydroxy, halo, amino, oxo, thio and C1-6 thioalkyl, and A is an amide of formula —C(O)—NH—R5, wherein R5 is selected from the group consisting of: C1-8 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C6 or 10 aryl and C7-16 aralkyl; or A is a carboxylic acid; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XXIII: R0 is a bond or difluoromethylene; R1 is hydrogen; R2 and R9 are each independently optionally substituted aliphatic group, optionally substituted cyclic group or optionally substituted aromatic group; R3, R5 and R7 are each independently: optionally substituted (1,1- or 1,2-)cycloalkylene; or optionally substituted (1,1- or 1,2-)heterocyclylene; or methylene or ethylene), substituted with one substituent selected from the group consisting of an optionally substituted aliphatic group, an optionally substituted cyclic group or an optionally substituted aromatic group, and wherein the methylene or ethylene is further optionally substituted with an aliphatic group substituent; or; R4, R6, R8 and R10 are each independently hydrogen or optionally substituted aliphatic group; is substituted monocyclic azaheterocyclyl or optionally substituted multicyclic azaheterocyclyl, or optionally substituted multicyclic azaheterocyclenyl wherein the unsaturatation is in the ring distal to the ring bearing the R9-L-(N(R8)—R7—C(O)—)nN(R6)—R5—C(O)—N moiety and to which the —C(O)—N(R4)—R3—C(O)C(O)NR2R1 moiety is attached; L is —C(O)—, —OC(O)—, —NR10C(O)—, —S(0)2-, or —NR10S(0)2-; and n is 0 or 1, provided when is substituted then L is —OC(O)— and R9 is optionally substituted aliphatic; or at least one of R3, R5 and R7 is ethylene, substituted with one substituent selected from the group consisting of an optionally substituted aliphatic group, an optionally substituted cyclic group or an optionally substituted aromatic group and wherein the ethylene is further optionally substituted with an aliphatic group substituent; or R4 is optionally substituted aliphatic; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XXIV: W is: m is 0 or 1; R2 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, aralkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkenylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, wherein any R2 carbon atom is optionally substituted with J; J is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, aralkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, heterocyclylalkyl, keto, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, alkanoylamino, aroylamino, aralkanoylamino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxamidoalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, formyl, acyl, sulfonyl, or sulfonamido and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J1 groups; J1 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, keto, hydroxy, amino, alkanoylamino, aroylamino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxamidoalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, formyl, sulfonyl, or sulfonamido; L is alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl, wherein any hydrogen is optionally substituted with halogen, and wherein any hydrogen or halogen atom bound to any terminal carbon atom is optionally substituted with sulfhydryl or hydroxy; A1 is a bond; R4 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, carboxyalkyl, or carboxamidoalkyl, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups; R5 and R6 are independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, aralkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups; X is a bond, —C(H)(R7)-, -0-, —S—, or —N(R8)-; R7 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups; R8 is hydrogen alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, aralkanoyl, heterocyclanoyl, heteroaralkanoyl, —C(O)R14, —S02R14, or carboxamido, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups; or R8 and Z, together with the atoms to which they are bound, form a nitrogen containing mono- or bicyclic ring system optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups; R14 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl; Y is a bond, —CH2—, —C(O)—, —C(O)C(O)—, —S(O)—, —S(0)2-, or —S(O)(NR7)—, wherein R7 is as defined above; Z is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, —OR2, or —N(R2)2, wherein any carbon atom is optionally substituted with J, wherein R2 is as defined above; A2 is a bond or R9 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, carboxyalkyl, or carboxamidoalkyl, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups; M is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, optionally substituted by 1-3 J groups, wherein any alkyl carbon atom may be replaced by a heteroatom; V is a bond, —CH2—, —C(H)(R11)—, -0-, —S—, or —N(R11)—; R11 is hydrogen or C1-3 alkyl; K is a bond, -0-, —S—, —C(O)—, —S(O)—, —S(0)2-, or —S(O)(NR11)—, wherein R11 is as defined above; T is —R12, -alkyl-R12, -alkenyl-R12, -alkynyl-R12, —OR12, —N(R12)2, —C(O)R12, —C(═NOalkyl)R12, or R12 is hydrogen, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkylidenyl, or heterocycloalkylidenyl, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups, or a first R12 and a second R12, together with the nitrogen to which they are bound, form a mono- or bicyclic ring system optionally substituted by 1-3 J groups; R10 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, carboxyalkyl, or carboxamidoalkyl, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 hydrogens J groups; R15 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, carboxyalkyl, or carboxamidoalkyl, and is optionally substituted with 1-3 J groups; and R16 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl; and or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XXV: E represents CHO or B(OH)2; R1 represents lower alkyl, halo-lower alkyl, cyano-lower alkyl, lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, aryl-lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, aryl-lower alkyl, heteroaryllower alkyl, lower alkenyl or lower alkynyl; R2 represents lower alkyl, hydroxy-lower alkyl, carboxylower alkyl, aryl-lower alkyl, aminocarbonyl-lower alkyl or lower cycloalkyl-lower alkyl; and R3 represents hydrogen or lower alkyl; or R2 and R3 together represent di- or trimethylene optionally substituted by hydroxy; R4 represents lower alkyl, hydroxy-lower alkyl, lower cycloalkyl-lower alkyl, carboxy-lower alkyl, aryllower alkyl, lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, cyano-lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, aryl-lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, aryl or lower cycloalkyl; R5 represents lower alkyl, hydroxy-lower alkyl, lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, aryl-lower alkyl, aryl-lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, cyano-lower alkylthio-lower alkyl or lower cycloalkyl; R6 represents hydrogen or lower alkyl; R7 represent lower alkyl, hydroxydower alkyl, carboxylower alkyl, aryl-lower alkyl, lower cycloalkyl-lower alkyl or lower cycloalkyl; R8 represents lower alkyl, hydroxy-lower alkyl, carboxylower alkyl or aryl-lower alkyl; and R9 represents lower alkylcarbonyl, carboxy-lower alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, lower alkylsulphonyl, arylsulphonyl, lower alkoxycarbonyl or aryl-lower alkoxycarbonyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; wherein in Formula XXVI: B is an acyl derivative of formula R11—C(O)— wherein R11 is Cl-10 alkyl optionally substituted with carboxyl; or R11 is C6 or C10 aryl or C7-16 aralkyl optionally substituted with a C1-6alkyl; a is 0 or 1; R6, when present, is carboxy(lower)alkyl; b is 0 or 1; R5, when present, is C1-6 alkyl, or carboxy(lower)alkyl; Y is H or C1-6alkyl; R4 is C1-10 alkyl; C3-10 cycloalkyl; R3 is C1-10 alkyl; C3-10 cycloalkyl; W is a group of formula: wherein R2 is C1-10 alkyl or C3-7 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with carboxyl; C6 or C10 aryl; or C7-16 aralkyl; or W is a group of formula: wherein X is CH or N; and R2′ is C3-4 alkylene that joins X to form a 5- or 6-membered ring, said ring optionally substituted with OH; SH; NH2; carboxyl; R12; OR12, SR12, NHR12 or NR12R12′ wherein R12 and R12′ are independently: cyclic C3-16 alkyl or acyclic C1-16 alkyl or cyclic C3-16 alkenyl or acyclic C2-16 alkenyl, said alkyl or alkenyl optionally substituted with NH2, OH, SH, halo, or carboxyl; said alkyl or alkenyl optionally containing at least one heteroatom selected independently from the group consisting of: 0, S, and N; or R12 and R12′ are independently C6 or C10 aryl or C7-16 aralkyl optionally substituted with C1-6alkyl, NH2, OH, SH, halo, carboxyl or carboxy(lower)alkyl; said aryl or aralkyl optionally containing at least one heteroatom selected independently from the group consisting of: 0, S, and N; said cyclic alkyl, cyclic alkenyl, aryl or aralkyl being optionally fused with a second 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring to form a cyclic system or heterocycle, said second ring being optionally substituted with NH2, OH, SH, halo, carboxyl or carboxy(lower)alkyl; C6 or C10 aryl, or heterocycle; said second ring optionally containing at least one heteroatom selected independently from the group consisting of: 0, S, and N; Q is a group of the formula: wherein Z is CH; X is O or S; R1 is H, C1-6 alkyl or C1-6 alkenyl both optionally substituted with thio or halo; and R13 is CO—NH—R14 wherein R14 is hydrogen, cyclic C3-10 alkyl or acyclic C1-10 alkyl or cyclic C3-10 alkenyl or acyclic C2-10 alkenyl, said alkyl or alkenyl optionally substituted with NH2, OH, SH, halo or carboxyl; said alkyl or alkenyl optionally containing at least one heteroatom selected independently from the group consisting of: 0, S, and N; or R14 is C6 or C10 aryl or C7-16 aralkyl optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl, NH2, OH, SH, halo, carboxyl or carboxy(lower)alkyl or substituted with a further C3-7 cycloalkyl, C6 or C10 aryl, or heterocycle; said aryl or aralkyl optionally containing at least one heteroatom selected independently from the group consisting of: O, S, and N; said cyclic alkyl, cyclic alkenyl, aryl or aralkyl being optionally fused with a second 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring to form a cyclic system or heterocycle, said second ring being optionally substituted with NH2, OH, SH, halo, carboxyl or carboxy(lower)alkyl or substituted with a further C3-7 cycloalkyl, C6 or C10 aryl, or heterocycle; said second ring optionally containing at least one heteroatom selected independently from the group consisting of: 0, S, and N; with the proviso that when Z is CH, then R13 is not an α-amino acid or an ester thereof; Q is a phosphonate group of the formula: wherein R15 and R16 are independently C6-20 aryloxy; and R1 is as defined above; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof, and (b) a controlled-release carrier to control the release of said at least one compound of Formulae I to XXVIII; wherein the carrier comprises at least one swellable polymer.

39. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 38, wherein the ingredients further comprise at least one disintegrant.

40. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 39, wherein at least one disintegrant is a superdisintegrant.

41. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 38, wherein the ingredients further comprise at least one lubricant.

42. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 38, wherein the ingredients further comprise at least one diluent.

43. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 38, wherein the ingredients comprise at least one swellable polymer at about 7 to about 25% wt.

44. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 40, wherein the ingredients comprise at least one disintegrant at about 15 to about 35% wt.

45. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 41, wherein the ingredients comprise at least one lubricant at about 6 to about 25% wt.

46. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 42, wherein the ingredients comprise at least one diluent at about 10 to about 30% wt.

47. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 38, wherein at least one swellable polymer is a polyvinylacetate.

48. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 40, wherein the ingredients comprise at least one disintegrant at about 15 to about 35% wt.

49. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 41, wherein the ingredients comprise at least one lubricant at about 6 to about 25% wt.

50. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 42, wherein the ingredients comprise at least one diluent at about 10 to about 30% wt.

51. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 38, wherein at least one compound is Formula I.

52. A method for modulating the activity of Hepatitis C virus (HCV) protease in a subject, wherein the method comprises administering to a subject in need of such treatment at least one HCV protease inhibitor in a pharmaceutically effective amount thereof in a controlled-release formulation of claim 38.